Yamaha RX V473 Owner's Manual

RX-V573 Owner's Manual RX-V573_manual

User Manual: Yamaha RX-V473 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 133 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
English
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FEATURES 5
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PREPARATIONS 11
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting Zone B speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 30
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
PLAYBACK 34
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
En 3
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Preparing Zone B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
CONFIGURATIONS 66
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 80
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Updating the unit’s firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
APPENDIX 86
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Accessories En 4
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.
YPAO microphone CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V573 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within 6 m (20 ft)
FEATURES ➤What you can do with the unit En 5
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
AV receiver (the unit)
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
The unit’s
remote control TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
.p.96
Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)
.p.35
Operating external
devices with the supplied
remote control
.p.82
**
* RX-V573 only
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad .p.46
•USB .p.50
• Media server (PC/NAS) .p.53
• Internet radio .p.56
•AirPlay .p.58
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Supports 2- to 5.1-channel (to 7.1-channel*)
speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
.p.30
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert
halls (CINEMA DSP)
.p.37
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
.p.41
• Playing back music in multiple rooms
(Zone B)*
.p.60
3D and 4K signals supported
FEATURES ➤What you can do with the unit En 6
Full of useful functions!
❑Connecting various devices (p.23)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
❑Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.18)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input
from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
❑Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.37)
The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you
to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D).
❑Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42)
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
❑Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.40)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,
which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑Easy operation with a TV screen
You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view
information, or easily configure the settings using the
on-screen menu.
❑Low power consumption
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption and helps to create an
eco-friendly home theater system (p.76).
BD/DVD
player
Game
console
Camcorder
Set-top box
TV
CD player
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Useful tips
The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.74).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.72).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, French, German, Spanish,
Russian and Chinese (p.29).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “Network Update” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu or
“UPDATE” (p.81) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware.
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Scene settings (p.35)
• Sound/video settings and signal information for each
source (p.62)
• Various function settings (p.67)
• System settings (p.80)
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 7
Front panel
1z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.72)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.72)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.78)
• An iPod is being charged (p.46)
3YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.30).
4Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.4).
5INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34).
6MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.43).
7PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.44).
8FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.42).
9TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.42).
0Front display
Displays information (p.8).
ADIRECT key
Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.40).
BPHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
CINPUT keys
Select an input source.
DTONE CONTROL key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.63).
ESCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.35).
FPROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.36).
GSTRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.39).
HVIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game
consoles (p.26).
IUSB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.50) or an iPod
(p.46).
JVOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
DIRECT
iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A
AUDIO
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX US B
TONE
PROGRAM
4:A2 3561789
B
JDFG IHCE
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 8
Front display (indicators)
1HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.
2CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.37) is working.
CINEMA DSP n
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39) is working.
3ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41) is
working.
4ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.63) is working.
5STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
6ZONE indicators (RX-V573 only)
“SP A” lights up when the Zone A speaker output is enabled
and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B speaker output is
enabled (p.61).
7SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
8MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
9Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
0Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
AInformation display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.34).
BSpeaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
LSubwoofer
AFront speaker (L)
SFront speaker (R)
DCenter speaker
FSurround speaker (L)
GSurround speaker (R)
HSurround back speaker (L)*
JSurround back speaker (R)*
KSurround back speaker*
* RX-V573 only
SW
C
LR
SLSR
VOL.
MUTE
ENHANCER
ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO
3
TUNED
SLEEP
SP A
SP B
SBL SBSBR
OUT
1 623 4 7 8 95
: >A B
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 9
Rear panel
1HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.18). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.
2HDMI 1–4 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).
3ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.26).
4NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.27).
5Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.28).
6AV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).
7AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.28).
8AUDIO jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting
audio signals (p.25).
9SUBWOOFER jack
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.15).
0MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks:
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.22).
VIDEO jack:
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.22).
ASPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.15).
• The SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks are available on
RX-V573 only.
BVOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.28).
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDI O
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
NETWORK
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
89A:7
21 4 53
6B
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(RX-V573 U.S.A. model)
FEATURES ➤Part names and functions En 10
Remote control
1Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2SOURCE z key
Turns on/off an external device.
SOURCE/RECEIVER key
Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is
operated with the remote control (p.83). You can operate the
unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device
when this key lights up in green.
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–4 HDMI 1–4 jacks
AV 1–6 AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO AUDIO jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
TUNER FM/AM radio
4Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.42).
FM Switches to FM radio.
AM Switches to AM radio.
MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
5INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34).
6Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.36).
7SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).
8SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.35).
9SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.66).
0Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
AMODE key
Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio
reception (p.42).
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.48).
BExternal device operation keys
Let you play back and select menus and perform other
operations for external devices (p.83).
CNumeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
DTV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.82).
ECODE SET button
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.82).
FZONE keys (RX-V573 only)
Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B (p.61).
★/★★ keys (RX-V473 only)
Change the external device to be controlled without
switching the input source (p.83).
GOPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.62).
HVOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
IMUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.82).
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
E
F
G
H
I
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
C
D
9
:
B
A
(RX-V573)
PREPARATIONS ➤General setup procedure En 11
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1Placing speakers (p.12) Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.
2Connecting speakers (p.15) Connect the speakers to the unit.
3Connecting a TV (p.18) Connect a TV to the unit.
4Connecting playback devices (p.23) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
5Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.26) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
6Connecting to a network (p.27) Connect the unit to a network.
7Connecting recording devices (p.28) Connect recording devices to the unit.
8Connecting the power cable (p.28) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
9Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.29) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
10 Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.30)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
PREPARATIONS ➤Placing speakers En 12
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
* RX-V573 only
• RX-V573 supports 2- to 7.1-channel system, and RX-V473 supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system.
1Placing speakers
Caution
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.14).
• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω.
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Speaker system (the number of channels)
7.1* 6.1* 5.1 4.1 3.1 2.1
Front (L) 1
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
●●●●●●
Front (R) 2●●●●●●
Center 3Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). ●●● ●
Surround (L) 4
Produce surround right/left channel sounds.
●●●●
Surround (R) 5●●●●
Surround back (L)* 6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
●
Surround back (R)* 7●
Surround back* 8Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds. ●
Subwoofer 9Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. ●●●●●●
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Placing speakers En 13
7.1-channel system (RX-V573 only)
6.1-channel system (RX-V573 only)
5.1-channel system
4.1-channel system
45
12
39
67
30 cm (1 ft) or more
10° to 30°10° to 30°
45
12
39
8
10° to 30°10° to 30°
45
12
39
10° to 30°10° to 30°
45
12
9
10° to 30°10° to 30°
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Placing speakers En 14
3.1-channel system
2.1-channel system
■Setting the speaker impedance
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
3Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
5Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
12
39
12
9
z (power)
STRAIGHT
SPIMP.8MIN
1Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting speakers En 15
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1-
and 7.1-channel systems as examples. For other
systems, connect speakers while referring to the
connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system.
Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)
5.1-channel system 7.1-channel system
(RX-V573 only)
2Connecting speakers
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.
–
+
–
+
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
1
67
2
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SINGLE jack (L side).
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting speakers En 16
■Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
aRemove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
bLoosen the speaker terminal.
cInsert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
dTighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
aTighten the speaker terminal.
bInsert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
■Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
(RX-V573 only)
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.69) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting
the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
Connecting Zone B speakers
(RX-V573 only)
The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input
source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A)
and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B
speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms
(RX-V573 only)” (p.60).
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
- (black)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
MONITOR OUT
Y
AV
OUT
AV6
Audio pin cable
12
3
45
9
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SPEAKERS
The unit (rear)
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.
• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp
connections.
1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Input/output jacks and cables En 17
■Video/audio jacks
❑HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is
required.
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission (through output)
features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.
■Video jacks
❑COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
❑VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
■Audio jacks
❑OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
❑COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
❑AUDIO jacks
(Stereo L/R jacks)
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable.
(Stereo mini jack)
Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
mini-plug cable.
Input/output jacks and cables
HDMI cable
Component video cable
Video pin cable
AV 4
OPTICAL
( TV )
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
Stereo mini-plug cable
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 18
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
■
Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.72) in the “Setup” menu.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
3Connecting a TV
When connecting a video device with an analog video output
• If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also
need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.22).
• If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the
unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.22).
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack? ■ Connection Method 3 (p.21)
■ Connection Method 2 (p.20)
■ Connection Method 1 (p.18)
■ Connection Method 4 (p.22)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.96).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HD
M
HDMI
OUT
ARC
ANTEN
AM
ARC
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
ARC
HDMI OUT jack HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
The unit (rear)
TV
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 19
❑Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2Configure the settings of the unit.
aCheck that ARC is enabled on the TV.
bSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
cPress SETUP.
dUse the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
ePress ENTER again.
fUse the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
gPress SETUP.
3Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
aEnable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
bTurn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
cTurn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
dSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
eCheck the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
fCheck that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.20).
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
RETURN
VOLUME
ENTER
TOP POP UP
DISPLAY
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
V
O
L
UME
TO
P
POP UP
DISP
L
A
Y
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
Auto
Auto
AV4
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 20
■Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.72) in the “Setup” menu.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
❑Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
2Configure the settings of the unit.
aSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
bPress SETUP.
cUse the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.
dPress ENTER again.
eUse the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.
fPress SETUP.
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
A
O
AV 4
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
HDMI
OUT
ARC
The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
RETURN
VOLUME
ENTER
TOP POP UP
DISPLAY
OPTION
SETUP
RETURN
V
O
L
UME
TO
P
POP UP
DISP
L
A
Y
O
PTI
O
N
SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Configuration
HDMI Control
Audio Output
Standby Through
TV Audio Input
Standby Sync
ARC
SCENE
On
Auto
Auto
AV4
Auto
On
Back: RETURN
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 21
3Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
aEnable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
bTurn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
cTurn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
dSwitch the TV input to display video from the unit.
eCheck the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
fCheck that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or
if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input”
(p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.35),
you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
■Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys,
the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the
SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
A
O
AV 4
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
HDMI
OUT
ARC
The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
HDMI input
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting a TV En 22
■Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the
unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO) jack of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio
will be played back on the unit.
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the
SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
❑COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
❑VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
PR
PB
Y
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI
4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
VIDEO
V
V
AV 4
(TV)
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
OO
MONITOR OUT
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack Video input
(composite video)
Audio output
(digital optical)
TV
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting playback devices En 23
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.46)
– Connecting a USB storage device (p.50)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24).
■HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–4, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.18 to 21).
■Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.22).
4Connecting playback devices
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3HDMI 4
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI 1–4 jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital optical AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV 4
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI
OUT
ARC
A
M
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OPTICAL COAXIAL
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
AV 1 AV 2
OO
CC
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
The unit (rear)
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)
AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting playback devices En 24
■Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).
■Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks
If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.
❑Necessary setting
For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
OUT
AV 4
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,
AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio Video Audio
HDMI
Digital optical HDMI 1–4 AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4 AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo HDMI 1–4 AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
Component video Analog stereo
AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)
AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
OUT
AV 4
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
AV 5
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
PR
PB
Y
AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
Audio output
(analog stereo)
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting playback devices En 25
1After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
2Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.
3Press OPTION.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (
e
/
r
) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be
used).
6Press OPTION.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6 or AUDIO, the audio played back on
the audio device will be output from the unit.
RETURN
VOLUME
BD
DVD
ENTER
TOP POP UP
DISPLAY
OPTION
SETUP
TV
NET
RADIO
RETURN
VO
LUME
BD
DV
D
TO
P
POP UP
DISPL
AY
SETUP
TV
NET
RADI
O
HDMI
AV
1 2 3
6
A
5
4
1 2 3 4
AUDIO
HDMI
AV
1
3
6
A
5
4
1
2
3
4
AUDIO
ENTER
OPTION
AV 2
Cursor keys
VOL.
AudioIn
VOL.
AudioAV5
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital optical AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)
Digital coaxial AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)
Analog stereo AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR
O
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SU
B
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO jacks
The unit (rear)
Audio device
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 26
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as
camcorders and portable audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).
• You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device.
• For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.46) or
“Connecting a USB storage device” (p.50).
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output
from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling and connecting the AM antenna
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUX USB
TONE
PROGRAM
V
Portable audio player
Camcorder
The unit (front)
5Connecting the FM/AM antennas
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND B
A
/ZONE
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
NETWORK
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting to a network En 27
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.77).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
6Connecting to a network
FRONT
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
NETWORK
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 Network connections 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS ➤Connecting recording devices En 28
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.
• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5–6 jacks or VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5–6 jacks, AUDIO jacks, or VIDEO
AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
7Connecting recording devices
AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
R
L
AUDIO
AV
OUT
VIDEO
VV
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video recording
device
8Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
E
NTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SPEAKERS
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
-
120V
220V
-
240V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
N
ETWORK
SPEAKERS
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Recording device connections 8Power cable connection 910
PREPARATIONS ➤Selecting an on-screen menu language En 29
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese.
1Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3Press SETUP.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
ENTER.
5Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.
6To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
9Selecting an on-screen menu language
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
中文
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
中文
123456789Language setting 10
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
RETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
SETUP
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 30
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
– Do not connect headphones.
1Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
2Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
3Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
• (RX-V573 only)
If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp
Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting
YPAO.
4Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
The following screen appears on the TV.
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
12
3
9
45
YPAO microphone
Listening
position
Ear height
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
The unit (front)
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Press SETUP key
to Start
“Power Amp Assign”
setting (p.69)
(RX-V573 only)
Power Amp Assign
Basic
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
RECEIVER z RECEIVER z
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 31
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the
cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the
measurement.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
5To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Start” and press SETUP.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to
start the measurement immediately.
• To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the
procedure in “Error messages” (p.32).
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
1The number of speakers (front side/rear
side/subwoofer)
2Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)
3Adjustment range of speaker output level
4Warning message (if available)
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.32) or “Warning messages” (p.33).
• A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in
the front display.
• If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use
the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages.
6To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
7Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
1
2
3
4
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
SAVE
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
SETUP
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 32
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
TV screen
Front display
■Procedure to handle errors
1Check the content of error message and
press ENTER.
2Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To exit the YPAO measurement:
aSelect “EXIT” and press ENTER.
bUse the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press
ENTER.
cDisconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
To retry the YPAO measurement from
beginning:
Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.
To proceed with the current YPAO
measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only):
Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.
Error
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
ERROR
E-5:Noisy
PROCEED
5%
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
E-5:NOISY
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP) Front speakers are not detected.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker
connections.
E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)
One of the surround speakers cannot be
detected.
E-4:SBR → SBL
(E-4:SBR → SBL)
A surround back speaker is connected to
the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to
connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY) The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and
ignores any noise detected.
E-6:Check Sur.
(E-6:CHECK SUR)
Surround back speakers are connected,
but no surround speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use
surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then reconnect the speakers.
E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC) The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO.
E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test
tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL) The measurement has been canceled. Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.
E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL) An internal error has occurred.
Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs
repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
PREPARATIONS ➤Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 33
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
TV screen
Front display
■Procedure to handle warnings
1Check the content of warning message
and press ENTER.
2Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To save the measurement results:
Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
To discard the measurement result:
Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
3Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.
Warning
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
W-1:Out of Phase
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
W-1:PHASE
Problem speaker (blinks)
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)
A speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If
the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this
message may appear even if the speakers are connected
correctly.
W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft)
from the listening position.
Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker
within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)
There are significant volume differences
between the speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of
each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is
any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect
speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.
12345678910 Automatic speaker setup
PLAYBACK ➤Basic playback procedure En 34
PLAYBACK
1Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42)
• Playing back iPod music (p.46)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.50)
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.53)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.56)
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.58)
4Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.63).
Switching information on the front display
1Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
Basic playback procedure
Input source group Item
HDMI 1–4
AV 1–6
AUDIO
V-AUX
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name)
TUNER
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.45).
VOL.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
AudioDecoder
Item name
VOL.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
ProLogic
Information
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
FM
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
A
B
Z
O
NE
S
LEE
P
INFO
VOLUME
MUTE
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 35
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target
zones (RX-V573 only) with just one touch.
1Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
* RX-V573: 7ch Stereo, RX-V473: 5ch Stereo
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or
start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction
with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.73) in the
“Setup” menu to “On”.
Configuring scene assignments
1Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.
• Select an input source (p.34)
• Select a sound program (p.36)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41)
• (RX-V573 only)
Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.61)
2Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
3If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER
blinks twice.
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.83) to register it.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE Input Sound
program
Compressed
Music
Enhancer
Target zone
(RX-V573 only)
SCENE
link
playback
BD/DVD HDMI 1 MOVIE
(Sci-Fi) Off
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
On
TV AV 4 STRAIGHT On
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
On
NET NET
RADIO
MUSIC
(7ch/5ch
Stereo*)
On
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
Off
RADIO TUNER
MUSIC
(7ch/5ch
Stereo*)
On
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled
Off
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
SETComplete
VOL.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
A
B
Z
O
NE
S
LEE
P
SCENE
SOURCE/RECEIVER
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 36
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.37)
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo
playback (p.38)
Press MUSIC repeatedly.
Selecting a surround decoder (p.40)
Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
Switching to the straight decode mode (p.39)
Press STRAIGHT.
Switching to the direct playback mode (p.40)
Press DIRECT.
Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41)
Press ENHANCER.
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM on the front panel.
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or
playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.39) is automatically
selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8).
Selecting the sound mode
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NE
T
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
DIRECT
ENHANCER
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 37
Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room.
• When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
• You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.63) in the “Option” menu.
■Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
Sci-Fi
VOL.
Sound program category
Sound program
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 38
■Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
5ch Stereo
(RX-V573: 7ch Stereo, RX-V473: 5ch Stereo)
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 39
■Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
CINEMA DSP 3D creates a natural stereoscopic sound field in your
room.
CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions
are met.
• One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch
Stereo) is selected (p.37).
• “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.
■Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch/5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the
unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the
front-side speakers.
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
■Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
• (RX-V573 only)
To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.63) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
3
Hall in Vienna
VOL.
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
STRAIGHT
VOL.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
STRAIGHT
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 40
■Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.93).
1Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
* RX-V573 only
(RX-V573 only)
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.
• You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.73)
in the “Setup” menu.
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(direct playback)
When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1Press DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is
enabled or disabled.
• When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not
available.
– Selecting sound programs
– Adjusting the tone control
– Operating the on-screen menu
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
bPro Logic Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLII Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for movies.
bPLIIx Movie*
bPLII Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for music.
bPLIIx Music*
bPLII Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for games.
bPLIIx Game*
Neo: 6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo: 6 Music Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
ProLogic
VOL.
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
DIRECT
VOL.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NE
T
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
SUR.DECODE
DIRECT
PLAYBACK ➤Selecting the sound mode En 41
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz
– High-definition streaming audio
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.64) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
SW
C
L
SLSR
ENHANCER
R
Enhancer On
VOL.
“ENHANCER” lights up
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENHANCER
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 42
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1Set the unit to standby mode.
2When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press z (power).
3Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.
4Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode
and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press FM or AM to select a band.
3Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM
radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.65) in the “Option” menu.
Listening to FM/AM radio
z (power)
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
TUFM50/AM9
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
VOL.
SBL SBR
FM87.50MHz
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
FM98.50MHz
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
TV
NET
RADI
O
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
TUNER
MODE
TUNING
FM
AM
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 43
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
■Registering radio stations automatically
(Auto Preset)
Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).
• To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press OPTION.
3Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.
4To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).
• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.
When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
■Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.42)
to tune into the desired radio station.
2Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.
VOL.
AutoPreset
VOL.
01:FM87.50MHz
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
Preset number from which to start the registration
VOL.
AutoPreset
STEREO
TUNED
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
VOL.
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset number
SW
C
L
SLSR
R
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
02:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
AM
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
MEMORY
PRESET
OPTION
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 44
■Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
■Clearing preset stations
Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.
1Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2Press OPTION.
3Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.
4Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.
If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.
5Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.
6To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
01:FM98.50MHz
PRESET VOL.
ClearPreset
STEREO
TUNED
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset station to be cleared
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
01:Cleared
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
RETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
TUNER
PRESET
OPTION
Cursor keys
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to FM/AM radio En 45
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
■Displaying the Radio Data System
information
1Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.43).
2Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
■Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
Frequency Frequency
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
ProgramType
INFO
Item name
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
CLASSICS
9850
Information
STEREO
VOL.
TUNED
SW
C
LR
SLSR
TPFM101.30MHz
FINISH
Traffic information station (frequency)
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
INFO
OPTION
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 46
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software
version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, and connect
your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.22). To select a video, operate the
iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours.
If “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
change until full.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playing back iPod music
Supported iPods (as of December 2011)
• iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.)
• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
• iPad2, iPad
RADIO
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUX US B
The unit (front)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
Connected
USB
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 47
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48).
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.48).
■Browse screen
1List name
2Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3Item number/total
4Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
iPod
Music
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
1/6
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
iPod
Now Playing
5:10
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
iPod
Music
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/6
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
USB
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 48
■Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
External device
operation keys Function
aResumes playback from pause.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding down).
j
1
2
iPod
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30 5:10
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Operational remote control
keys Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
aStarts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
sStops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
hSearches forward/backward (while holding
down).
j
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
D
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iPod music En 49
■Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”
appears in the TV screen.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
OPTION
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 50
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files.
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
Connecting a USB storage device
1Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
RADIO
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUX USB
USB
The unit (front)
USB storage device
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
Connected
USB
1/12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
USB
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 51
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
■Browse screen
1List name
2Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3Item number/total
4Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
USB
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/12
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
USB
Top
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 52
■Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
■Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
External device
operation keys Function
aResumes playback from pause.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
USB
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
D
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 53
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files.
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
■For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
1Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
2In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
■For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.
1Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
1/4
DESKTOP
NAS A
NAS B
NOTE
SERVER
Media Server
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
RETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 54
3Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
■Browse screen
1List name
2Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3Item number/total
4Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
5Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
SERVER
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/14
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking
SERVER
NAS A
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 55
■Playback screen
1Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.78).
■Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
External device
operation keys Function
aResumes playback from pause.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
1
2
SERVER
Now Playing
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
D
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
OPTION
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to Internet radio En 56
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.27). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
1Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this
feature, you need the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your
personal account. You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in
“Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
Listening to Internet radio
1/7
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
NET RADIO
Top
Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
NET RADIO
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK ➤Listening to Internet radio En 57
■Browse screen
1List name
2Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
3Item number/total
4Playback indicator
5Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
■Playback screen
1Playback indicator
2Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
• Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Icon Function
Moves 10 pages backward.
Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.
14
5
2
3
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing
1/7
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
NET RADIO
Top
1
2
Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
NET RADIO
Now Playing
[DISPLAY] to List Browse
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
RETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
D
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 58
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup”
menu.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
1Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
( ) appears.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
2On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
3Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
Supported iTunes/iPods (as of December 2011)
• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)
• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later
PC
iTunes
Router
Playback starts
iPod
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
The unit
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 59
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu.
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• To adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.65) in
the “Option” menu to “Limited” (default) or “Full”.
■Playback screen
1Playback indicator
2Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in
advance.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
External device
operation keys Function
aResumes playback from pause.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
2
1
Artist Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30
AirPlay
Now Playing
5:30
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
D
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only) En 60
The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in
the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room
(Zone B).
For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you
are in the living room, and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when
you are in the study room. Also, you can turn on both zones when
you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms
simultaneously.
• Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the zone B.
• The same input source and volume setting are applied to both zones.
• You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction
with a scene selection (p.35)
Preparing Zone B
Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit.
Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker
cables.
To utilize the SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks for Zone B
speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to
“ZoneB” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only)
Living room (Zone A)
Study room (Zone B)
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
12
12
39
45
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
The unit (rear)
Zone A
Zone B
PLAYBACK ➤Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only) En 61
■Basic playback procedure
1Press ZONE A or ZONE B to enable/disable audio
output to Zone A or Zone B.
“SP A” lights up in the front display when the Zone A output
is enabled and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B output is
enabled.
2Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
4Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
■Adjusting the volume for Zone B
If you are bothered by volume differences between Zone A/B,
follow the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B.
1Press OPTION.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim”
(Volume Trim) and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim”
(ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the
setting.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
SP A
SP B
HDMI1
“SP A” and/or “SP B” light up
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
S
LEE
P
ENTER
RETURN
VOLUME
OPTION
ZONE A
ZONE B
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK ➤Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 62
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SLSR
ToneControl
OPTION
Tone Control
DSP/Surround
Volume Trim
Lipsync
Signal Info
Audio In
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds. 63
DSP/Surround
(DSP/Surround)
DSP Level
(DSP Level) Adjusts the sound field effect level. 63
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
63
Extended
Surround
(EXTD)
(RX-V573 only)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
63
Enhancer
(Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 64
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. 64
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 64
ZoneB Trim
(ZB.Trim)
(RX-V573 only)
Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B. 61
Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”
menu. 64
Signal Info (Signal Info) Displays information about the video/audio signal. 64
Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source
with an audio jack of others. 65
Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with radio sounds. 65
Auto Preset (Auto Preset) Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets. 43
Clear Preset (Clear Preset) Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. 44
Traffic Program (TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
45
PLAYBACK ➤Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 63
■Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
aPress TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
bPress PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
■DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)
Configures the sound field program and surround settings.
❑DSP Level (DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments)
Default
0 dB
❑Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
❑Extended Surround (EXTD)
(RX-V573 only)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.49),
USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55). —
Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.49),
USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55). —
Volume Interlock (Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod
via AirPlay. 65
Item Function Page
On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
Auto (Auto)
(default)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the
signal in 5.1-channel.)
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
PLAYBACK ➤Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 64
• Some Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. In
this case, the unit reproduces the signals in 5.1-channel if “Extended Surround” is set to “Auto”. To
reproduce the signals in 6.1 or 7.1-channel, set it to “bPLIIx Movie”, “bPLIIx Music”, or “EX/ES”.
❑Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41).
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.41).
Settings
Default
USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, TUNER: On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
■Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑Input Trim (In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
❑Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
■Lipsync (Lipsync)
Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.74) in the “Setup” menu.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
■Signal Info (Signal Info)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.
Choices
• To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
On (On) (default) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.
Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal
Channel (CHAN)
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels,
and LFE.
Sampling (SAMPL) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate (B RATE) The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Input (V IN) Type and resolution of input signal
Output (V OUT) Type and resolution of output signal
PLAYBACK ➤Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 65
■Audio In (Audio In)
Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–4 or AV 1–2) with an
audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases.
• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–2
■Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV 1” or “AV 4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV 5”, “AV 6”, or “AUDIO”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding
audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.
■Video Out (Video Out)
Selects a video to be output with radio sounds.
Settings
■Volume Interlock (Interlock)
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Settings
Off (Off) (default) Does not output video.
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6,
V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (Ltd)
(default)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80
dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full (Full) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 66
CONFIGURATIONS
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.
1Press SETUP.
2Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
4Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
5To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 67
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Configuration
Power Amp Assign (RX-V573 only)
Selects a speaker system. 69
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. 69
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 69
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 69
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 70
Surround Back (RX-V573 only)
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 70
Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 70
Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. 70
Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 70
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 71
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 71
Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 71
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 71
HDMI Configuration
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. 72
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 72
Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 72
TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. 72
Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. 73
ARC Enables/disables ARC. 73
SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. 73
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 68
Sound
DSP Parameter
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 73
Panorama Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. 73
Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 74
Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. 74
Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 74
Lipsync
Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 74
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 74
Vol ume
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 75
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 75
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 75
ECO
Auto Power Down Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 75
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 76
Function
Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. 76
Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 77
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 77
Network
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 77
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 78
DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 78
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 78
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 78
Information Displays the network information on the unit. 79
Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. 79
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 79
Menu Item Function Page
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 69
Speaker
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
❑Power Amp Assign
(RX-V573 only)
Selects a speaker system.
In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations
are possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connection.
Settings
❑Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
Settings
❑Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
❑Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Basic (default) Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connection).
BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.16).
ZoneB Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.60) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A).
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Distance
Level
Equalizer
Test Tone
Use (default)
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
None Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 70
❑Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
❑Surround Back
(RX-V573 only)
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
• “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”, or
when “Surround” is set to “None”.
❑Crossover
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
❑Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the
subwoofer phase.
Settings
❑Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Small x2 (default)
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce
surround back channel audio.
Normal (default) Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.
Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.
Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
low-frequency components.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 71
■Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (RX-V573 only),
Surround Back R (RX-V573 only), Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)
Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
■Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (RX-V573 only),
Surround Back R (RX-V573 only), Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
Others: -1.0 dB
■Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
❑EQ Select
Selects the type of equalizer to be used.
Settings
• “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.30).
■Manual equalizer adjustment
1Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select
the desired speaker channel.
3Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor
keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
4To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
PEQ Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO
measurement (p.30).
GEQ (default) Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
Off Does not use the equalizer.
Off (default) Does not output test tones.
On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Equalizer
EQ Select
GEQ Edit
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz
GEQ
Front L
Back:RETURN
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 72
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
■Configuration
❑HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.96).
Settings
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Settings
❑Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the
standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
❑TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AV 1–6, AUDIO
Default
AV 4
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”,
and “SCENE”.
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers.
On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Configuration
Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes approximately 1 W of power.)
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 73
❑Standby Sync
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
❑ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.18) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑SCENE
Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected
to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection.
• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device
• Playback device: starting playback
Choices (SCENE keys)
BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO
Settings
Default
BD/DVD, TV: On
NET, RADIO: Off
• SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend
using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively.
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
■DSP Parameter
Configures the surround decoder settings.
❑CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch
Stereo).
Settings
❑Panorama
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is
enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a
spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is
effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (RX-V573 only) is selected.
Settings
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Off Disables ARC.
On (default) Enables ARC.
Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On (default) Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off (default) Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
On Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
DSP Parameter
Lipsync
Volume
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 74
❑Center Width
Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective
when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (RX-V573 only) is selected.
Setting range
0 to 7
Default
3
❑Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to
strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This
setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (RX-V573 only) is selected.
Setting range
-3 to +3
Default
0
❑Center Image
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher
to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken
(more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 1.0
Default
0.3
■Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.
• You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.64) in the “Option” menu.
❑Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
• “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.
❑Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to
“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
Auto (default)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 75
■Volume
Configures the volume settings.
❑Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
❑Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
❑Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
■Auto Power Down
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Min/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.
-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
(0.5 dB increments) Sets the level to the specified volume level.
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Auto Power Down
ECO Mode
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 76
■ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
• Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the
unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
■Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
Input sources
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6, AUDIO, USB, V-AUX
■Procedure
1Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press
ENTER.
• To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the
cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name.
2Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.
3To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
• To cancel the entry, press RETURN.
Off (default) Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
Input Rename
Dimmer
Memory Guard
Input Rename
Blu-ray
HDMI1
OK:ENTER
CANCEL:RETURN
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 77
4To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.
5To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■Dimmer
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.76) is set to “On”.
■Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Network
Configures the network settings.
■IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
■Manual network settings
1Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Off (default) Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
o
Memory Guard
Memory Guard On
Back:RETURN
Icon
Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
IP Address
MAC Address Filter
DMC Control
Network Standby
Network Name
Information
Network Update
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 78
■MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
❑MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■Procedure
1Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10).
2Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
3To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
■DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Settings
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
■Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
■Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■Procedure
1Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.
3To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
4To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.
Off (default) Disables the network standby function.
On Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes approximately 2 W of power.)
Network Name
YAMAHA xxxxxx
Back:RETURN
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 79
■Information
Displays the network information on the unit.
■Network Update
Updates the firmware via the network.
❑Perform Update
Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s
firmware” (p.85).
❑Firmware Version
Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.
❑System ID
Displays the system ID number.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
• Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
MAC Address MAC address
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack
vTuner ID The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner)
English (default) English
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Chinese
Setup
Speaker
HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Русский
中文
Français
Deutsch
Español
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 80
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
z(power).
3Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5Press z(power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
1Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object, such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
2Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.
• The registered remote control codes (p.82) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item Function Page
SP IMP. (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changes the speaker impedance setting. 80
REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 80
TU (Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 81
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. 81
INIT Restores the default settings. 81
UPDATE Updates the firmware. 81
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 81
z(power)
STRAIGHTPROGRAM
6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8 Ω MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
SPIMP.8MIN
REMOTEIDID1
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 81
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Restoring the default settings (INIT)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the “Network
Update” screen. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.85).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.
FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
TUFM50/AM9
TVFORMATNTSC
INITCANCEL
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
UPDATEUSB
VERSIONxx.xx
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 82
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
Registering the remote control code for a TV
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.83). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
1Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3Press TV z.
4Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
■TV operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
Controlling external devices with the remote control
TV operation keys
INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH Switch the channels of the TV
TV zTurns on/off the TV.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NE
T
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
TV z
SOURCE/RECEIVER
CODE SET
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 83
Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
• (RX-V473 only)
If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (★ or ★★)
key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input
source after pressing the star key.
1Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
2Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
3Press the input selection key.
For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code
for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack.
4Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.35).
■Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in
orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
SOURCE zTurns on/off the playback device.
Menu operation
keys
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
DISPLAY Switches information on the display.
External device
operation keys
TOP MENU Displays the top menu.
POP-UP
MENU Displays the pop-up menu.
sStops playback.
dStops playback temporarily.
aStarts playback of the selected
song/video.
hSearches forward/backward (by
holding down).
j
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Numeric keys Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys Control the TV (p.82).
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
D
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
A
B
Z
O
NE
S
LEE
P
DISPLAY
SOURCE z
SOURCE/RECEIVER
CODE SET
External device
operation keys
Numeric keys
TV operation keys
Menu operation keys
Input selection keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Controlling external devices with the remote control En 84
Resetting remote control codes
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.
1Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
2Press the input selection key.
3Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.
Once the remote control code is reset successfully,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
aPress CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
bPress SOURCE/RECEIVER.
cUse the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
A
B
Z
O
NE
S
LEE
P
SOURCE/RECEIVER
CODE SET
Numeric keys
Input selection keys
CONFIGURATIONS ➤Updating the unit’s firmware En 85
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81).
1Press SETUP.
2Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press
ENTER.
3Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and
press ENTER.
If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears
in the “Network Update” screen.
• To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP.
4Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and
press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update
starts.
5If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press z (power) on the
front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
Updating the unit’s firmware
Note
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
• To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via
HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81).
p
Update:ENTER
Network Update
Perform Update
Firmware Version
System ID
x.xx
xxxxxxxx
Back:RETURN
Icon
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
RETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NET
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
ENTER
SETUP
Cursor keys
APPENDIX ➤Frequently asked questions En 86
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize
the speaker settings again (p.30). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,
use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.69).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.75).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.75).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the
front display when selecting an input source...
By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the
front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,
use “Input Rename” (p.76) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the
presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”).
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.77).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.80).
Frequently asked questions
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 87
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
aThe power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
bThe unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
cThe connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power and system
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator
on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z(power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit.
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).
The unit enters
standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu
to “Off” (p.75).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.80).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down z(power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit.
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 88
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64).
(RX-V573 only)
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.75).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.71).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.69).
The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.71).
(RX-V573 only)
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
(RX-V573 only)
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.63).
“Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”.
When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”,
you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the surround back speakers,
set “Power Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.69).
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.70).
Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.30) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.69).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 89
Video
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.72).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.72).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.73). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.76).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. (This
may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about
video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). For information about video signals supported
by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.98).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 90
FM/AM radio
USB and network
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.18 to 21).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.42).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.42).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.42).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.43).
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device. The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.77). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.77).
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤Troubleshooting En 91
Remote control
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.53).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53).
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key
lights up in orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80).
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.82). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX ➤Error indications on the front display En 92
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.53).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.27).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Connect error The unit has detected the iPod, but cannot access it. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
Unknown iPod The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.46).
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
APPENDIX ➤Glossary En 93
Audio information
■Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
APPENDIX ➤Glossary En 94
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
APPENDIX ➤Glossary En 95
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
APPENDIX ➤Information on HDMI En 96
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.18) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.35)
• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.83)
HDMI
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
P
R
P
B
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT VIDEO
in
VIDEO in
COMPONENT VIDEO
out
VIDEO out
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
APPENDIX ➤Information on HDMI En 97
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.72) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby
Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”).
3Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
5Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
6Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
7Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
APPENDIX ➤Information on HDMI En 98
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz • 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz (4K signals)
• 576p/50 Hz • 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz (4K signals)
APPENDIX ➤Reference diagram (rear panel) En 99
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
NETWORK
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
(RX-V573 U.S.A. model)
APPENDIX ➤Trademarks En 100
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
(For RX-V473)
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
(For RX-V573)
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows®
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows
Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Trademarks
APPENDIX ➤Specifications En 101
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO, V-AUX [Mini Jack])
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV 3–6, V-AUX)
Component x 2 (AV 1–2)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 4 (HDMI 1–4)
•Other
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
[RX-V573]
- Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R*)
* Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B]
- Subwoofer Out x 1
- AV OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
[RX-V473]
- Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 1
- AV OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
•Video
MONITOR OUT
- Component x 1
- Composite x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,
ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
- 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz
• Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
-DSD 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
TUNER
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital EX
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
[RX-V573]
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
[RX-V473]
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic II Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Specifications
APPENDIX ➤Specifications En 102
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8
Ω
)
[Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................95 W+95 W
Center ............................................................................... 95 W
Surround L/R...........................................................95 W+95 W
Surround Back L/R [RX-V573] ............................... 95 W+95 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
[Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................... 115 W/ch
Center ....................................................................... 115 W/ch
Surround L/R.............................................................. 115 W/ch
Surround Back L/R [RX-V573] ................................... 115 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (
JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6
Ω
)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Front L/R .................................................................... 135 W/ch
Center ........................................................................ 135 W/ch
Surround L/R.............................................................. 135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R [RX-V573] ................................... 135 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Front L/R (8/6/4 Ω)............................................ 110/130/160 W
[Other models]
Front L/R (6/4 Ω)...................................................... 110/130 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω.................................................................................. 0.2 dB
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Signal
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V
• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) .............................100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz)..........................+0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 5 etc.
(Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
.........................................................................100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics
Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround)................................ 12 dB/oct.
H.P.F. (Surround Back [RX-V573])............................ 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC
[Other models]....................................................................PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models]................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ................................................................................71 dB
Stereo...............................................................................69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono ................................................................................. 0.3%
Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..........................530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models]......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models].........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz
APPENDIX ➤Specifications En 103
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............. AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] .................................... AC220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................270 W/320 VA
[Other models]................................................................ 280 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off...............0.1 W or less
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)
...........................................................................1.0 W (Typical)
Network Standby On .........................................2.0 W (Typical)
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
...................... 435 x 161 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-3/8”)
•Weight
[RX-V573] ....................................................... 8.2 kg (18.1 lbs)
[RX-V473] ....................................................... 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX ➤Index En 104
Symbols
★/★★ keys ................................................10
Envelope icon (p) ....................................85
Lock icon (o) ...........................................77
Numerics
2.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................14
2ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38
3.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................14
4.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
4K signal (Video resolution) ......................98
5.1-channel system
(Speaker connection) ............................15
5.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
5ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38
6.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
7.1-channel system
(Speaker connection) ............................15
7.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
7ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38
A
A.DRC (Option menu) ...............................63
Action Game (Sound program) .................37
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) ...................63
Adjustment (Setup menu, Lipsync) ...........74
ADVANCED SETUP ..................................80
AirPlay .......................................................58
AM antenna ...............................................26
ARC .......................................................... 18
ARC (Setup menu, HDMI) ........................ 73
ARC-compatible TV (Connection) ............ 18
Audio Decoder (Front display) ................. 34
Audio device connection ......................... 25
Audio In (Option menu) ...................... 25, 65
AUDIO jack .............................................. 17
Audio Output (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72
Audio Return Channel .............................. 18
Auto Power Down (Setup menu, ECO) .... 75
Auto Preset (FM radio) ............................. 43
Automatic preset (FM radio) .................... 43
AV OUT jack ............................................. 28
B
B RATE (Signal information) ..................... 64
Banana plug ............................................. 16
Bass (Option menu) ................................. 63
Battery ........................................................ 4
BI-AMP (Setup menu) .............................. 69
Bi-amp speaker connections ................... 16
Bi-amplification connection ...................... 94
Bitrate (Signal information) ....................... 64
C
CAT-5 (Network cable) ............................. 27
Cellar Club (Sound program) ................... 38
Center (Setup menu, Speaker) ................ 69
Center Image
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74
Center Width
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74
Chamber (Sound program) ...................... 38
CHAN (Signal information) ....................... 64
Channel (Signal information) .................... 64
Charge (iPod) ........................................... 46
CINEMA DSP ............................................ 37
CINEMA DSP 3D ...................................... 39
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73
COAXIAL jack .......................................... 17
Combination of video/audio input jacks ... 24
Component video cable ........................... 17
Component video connection
(Playback devices) ............................... 23
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ....................... 17
Composite video connection
(Playback devices) ............................... 24
Compressed Music Enhancer .................. 41
Configuration (Scene function) ................ 35
Configuration (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72
Configuration (Setup menu, Speaker) ...... 69
Connection (Audio devices) ..................... 25
Connection (iPod) .................................... 46
Connection (NAS) .................................... 27
Connection (PC) ....................................... 27
Connection (Recording device) ............... 28
Connection (Speaker cables) .................. 16
Connection (Subwoofer) .......................... 16
Connection (USB storage device) ........... 50
Connection (Video devices) ..................... 23
Controlling external devices ..................... 82
Crossover (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 70
Crossover frequency setting
(Subwoofer) .......................................... 30
Crossover frequency setting (the unit) ..... 70
Index
APPENDIX ➤Index En 105
D
Default Gateway
(Setup menu, IP Address) .....................77
DHCP (Setup menu, IP Address) ..............77
Digital coaxial cable ..................................17
Digital Media Controller ............................78
Digital optical cable ..................................17
Dimension
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ..............74
Dimmer (Setup menu, Function) ...............77
DIRECT (Sound mode) .............................40
Direct playback .........................................40
Distance (Setup menu, Speaker) ..............71
DLNA-compatible NAS .............................53
DMC (Digital Media Controller) .................78
DMC Control (Setup menu, Network) .......78
DNS Server (Setup menu, IP Address) .....77
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) ......63
Dolby Pro Logic (Surround decoder) ........40
Dolby Pro Logic II (Surround decoder) .....40
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Surround decoder) ...40
Drama (Sound program) ...........................37
DSP Level (Option menu) .........................63
DSP Parameter (Setup menu, Sound) ......73
DSP Program (Front display) ....................34
DSP/Surround (Option menu) ...................63
DTS Neo: 6 (Surround decoder) ...............40
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) ...................63
Dynamic Range (Setup menu, Volume) ....75
E
ECO (Setup menu) ....................................75
ECO Mode (Setup menu, ECO) ................76
Enhancer (Option menu) ...........................64
ENHANCER (Sound mode) .......................41
EQ Select (Setup menu, Equalizer) ..........71
Equalizer (Setup menu, Speaker) .............71
Error indications on the front display ....... 92
Error message (YPAO) ............................. 32
EX/ES (Extended Surround) ..................... 63
EXTD (Option menu) ................................ 63
Extended Surround (Option menu) .......... 63
External device operation keys ................ 10
Extra Bass (Setup menu, Speaker) .......... 70
F
Firmware update ...................................... 85
Firmware version ...................................... 81
FM antenna .............................................. 26
FORMAT (Signal information) ................... 64
Format (Signal Information) ...................... 64
Frequency (FM/AM radio) ........................ 42
Frequency step setting (FM/AM radio) .... 42
Front (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 69
Front display (Part name and functions) .... 8
Front display information .......................... 34
Front panel (Part names and functions) ..... 7
Function (Setup menu) ............................. 76
G
GEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71
H
Hall in Munich (Sound program) .............. 38
Hall in Vienna (Sound program) ............... 38
HDMI (Setup menu) ................................. 72
HDMI cable .............................................. 17
HDMI connection (Playback devices) ...... 23
HDMI Control ........................................... 96
HDMI Control (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72
HDMI Control-compatible TV
(Connection) ........................................ 20
HDMI jack ................................................ 17
HDMI OUT (TV) (Setup menu, HDMI) ...... 72
Headphones .............................................. 7
High definition audio ................................ 98
High speed HDMI cable .......................... 17
I
Impedance (Speaker) .............................. 12
In.Trim (Option menu) .............................. 64
Indicators (Part name and functions) ......... 8
INFO key .................................................. 34
Information (Front display) ....................... 34
Information (Setup menu, Network) ......... 79
INIT (ADVANCED SETUP) ........................ 81
Initial Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ....... 75
Input (Front display) ................................. 34
Input (Signal information) ......................... 64
Input Rename (Setup menu, Volume) ...... 76
Input selection keys ................................. 10
Input Trim (Option menu) ......................... 64
Interlock (Option menu) ........................... 65
Internet radio ............................................ 56
IP Address (Setup menu, Network) .......... 77
iPad .......................................................... 46
iPhone ...................................................... 46
iPod .......................................................... 46
iTunes ....................................................... 58
L
Language ................................................. 29
Language (Setup menu) .......................... 29
Level (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 71
LFE ........................................................... 94
Lipsync (Option menu) ............................. 64
Lipsync (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 74
Low Frequency Effects ............................. 94
M
MAC Address Filter
(Setup menu, Network) ........................ 78
Manual preset (FM/AM radio) .................. 43
APPENDIX ➤Index En 106
Manual speaker configuration
(Setup menu) ........................................69
Max Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ..........75
Media Sharing ...........................................53
MEMORY (FM/AM radio) ...........................43
Memory (FM/AM radio) .............................43
Memory Guard (Setup menu, Function) ...77
MODE key .................................................42
Monaural reception mode (FM radio) .......42
Mono Movie (Sound program) ..................37
MOVIE (Sound program category) ...........37
Multiple room playback .............................60
MUSIC (Sound program category) ...........38
Music Video (Sound program) ..................38
MUTE key ..................................................34
Muting .......................................................34
N
NAS ...........................................................53
Neo: 6 Cinema (Surround decoder) .........40
Neo: 6 Music (Surround decoder) ............40
NET RADIO (Input) ....................................56
Network (Setup menu) ..............................77
Network cable ...........................................27
Network information ..................................79
Network Name (Setup menu, Network) ....78
Network Standby
(Setup menu, Network) .........................78
Network Update
(Setup menu, Network) .........................79
NTSC (Video signal type) ..........................81
O
OPTICAL jack ............................................17
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically .........................................30
OPTION key ..............................................62
Option menu ............................................ 62
Option menu item list ............................... 62
Output (Signal information) ...................... 64
P
PAL (Video signal type) ............................ 81
Panorama
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73
PC ............................................................ 53
PEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71
PHONES jack ............................................. 7
Placement (Speakers) .............................. 12
Playback (iPod) ........................................ 47
Playback (NAS) ........................................ 53
Playback (PC) .......................................... 53
Playback (Server) ..................................... 53
Playback (USB storage device) ............... 50
Playback device operations
(Remote control) .................................. 83
PLII Game (Surround decoder) ................ 40
PLII Movie (Surround decoder) ................ 40
PLII Music (Surround decoder) ................ 40
PLIIx Game (Surround decoder) .............. 40
PLIIx Mo (Extended Surround) ................. 63
PLIIx Movie (Extended Surround) ............ 63
PLIIx Movie (Surround decoder) .............. 40
PLIIx Mu (Extended Surround) ................. 63
PLIIx Music (Extended Surround) ............ 63
PLIIx Music (Surround decoder) .............. 40
Power Amp Assign
(Setup menu, Speaker) ........................ 69
Preparation (Zone B) ................................ 60
Preset (FM/AM radio) ............................... 43
Preset station select (FM/AM radio) ......... 44
Preset stations (FM/AM radio) .................. 43
R
Radio Data System ................................... 45
Rear panel (Part name and functions) ....... 9
Recording device connection .................. 28
Remote control
(Part name and functions) .................... 10
Remote control code for a TV .................. 82
Remote Control Code Search .................. 83
Remote control codes for playback
devices ................................................. 83
Remote control ID .................................... 80
Remote control sensor ............................... 4
Remote control signal transmitter ............ 10
REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP) ........... 80
Restore of the default settings ................. 81
Roleplaying Game (Sound program) ....... 37
Router ....................................................... 27
S
SAMPL (Signal information) ..................... 64
Sampling (Signal information) .................. 64
SCENE ...................................................... 35
SCENE (Setup menu, HDMI) .................... 73
SCENE function ........................................ 35
Scene function ......................................... 35
Scene function configuration ................... 35
Sci-Fi (Sound program) ............................ 37
Server ....................................................... 53
SERVER (Input) ........................................ 53
Setup menu .............................................. 66
Setup menu item list ................................. 67
Sharing Setup ........................................... 53
Signal Info (Option menu) ........................ 64
SILENT CINEMA ....................................... 41
Simple play (iPod) .................................... 48
SLEEP key ................................................ 10
Sleep timer ............................................... 10
APPENDIX ➤Index En 107
Sound (Setup menu) .................................73
sound field effect ......................................37
Sound mode ..............................................36
Sound program .........................................37
Sound program category ..........................37
SP A indicator ...........................................61
SP B indicator ...........................................61
SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP) ..................14
Speaker connection ..................................15
Speaker connection (Bi-amp) ...................16
Speaker connection (Zone B) ...................60
Speaker impedance ..................................12
Speaker impedance setting ......................14
Speaker indicators ......................................8
Speaker placement ...................................12
Spectacle (Sound program) .....................37
Sports (Sound program) ...........................37
Standard (Sound program) .......................37
Standby indicator ........................................7
Standby Sync (Setup menu, HDMI) ..........73
Standby Through (Setup menu, HDMI) ....72
Stereo mini jack .........................................17
Stereo mini-plug cable ..............................17
Stereo pin cable ........................................17
STP network cable ....................................27
STRAIGHT (Sound mode) .........................39
Straight decode ........................................39
Subnet Mask (Setup menu, IP Address) ...77
Subwoofer (Setup menu, Speaker) ...........69
Subwoofer connection ..............................16
Subwoofer Phase
(Setup menu, Speaker) .........................70
Subwoofer Trim (Option menu) .................64
SUR.DEC (Sound mode) ...........................40
SUR.DECODE (Sound mode) ...................40
Surround (Setup menu, Speaker) .............70
Surround Back (Setup menu, Speaker) ... 70
Surround decoder .................................... 40
SW.Trim (Option menu) ............................ 64
System ID (Setup menu, Network) ........... 79
T
Test Tone (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 71
The Bottom Line (Sound program) ........... 38
The Roxy Theatre (Sound program) ......... 38
Tone Control (Option menu) .................... 63
TONE CONTROL key ............................... 63
TP (Traffic Program) ................................. 45
Traffic information .................................... 45
Traffic Program (Option menu) ................ 45
Treble (Option menu) ............................... 63
TU (ADVANCED SETUP) .......................... 42
Tuning (FM/AM radio) .............................. 42
TV Audio Input (Setup menu, HDMI) ........ 72
TV connection .......................................... 18
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP) .......... 81
TV operation keys .................................... 10
TV operations (Remote control) ............... 82
TV with HDMI input jacks (Connection) ... 21
TV without HDMI input jacks
(Connection) ........................................ 22
U
UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP) ................ 81
Update of the unit’s firmware ................... 85
Updating the firmware .............................. 81
USB (Input) ........................................ 47, 50
USB jack .................................................... 7
USB mass storage class .......................... 50
USB storage device ................................. 50
V
V IN (Signal information) .......................... 64
V OUT (Signal information) ....................... 64
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP) ............... 81
VIDEO AUX jacks ..................................... 26
VIDEO jack ............................................... 17
Video Out (Option menu) ......................... 65
Video pin cable ........................................ 17
Video signal flow ...................................... 96
Video signal type ...................................... 81
Video/audio input jack combination ......... 24
Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 39
Virtual Presence Speaker ........................... 6
VOLTAGE SELECTOR .............................. 28
Voltage selector ....................................... 28
Volume (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 75
Volume Interlock (Option menu) .............. 65
Volume Trim (Option menu) ..................... 64
VPS ............................................................. 6
vTuner ID (Network information) .............. 79
W
Warning message (YPAO) ....................... 33
Windows Media Player ............................. 53
Y
Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer .............................................. 30
YPAO ........................................................ 30
YPAO MIC jack ......................................... 30
YPAO microphone .................................... 30
Z
ZB.Trim (Option menu) ............................. 61
ZONE A key .............................................. 61
Zone B ...................................................... 60
ZONE B key .............................................. 61
Zone B operation ...................................... 61
Zone B preparation .................................. 60
Zone B speaker connections ................... 60
Zone B volume adjustment ...................... 61
APPENDIX ➤Index En 108
ZoneB (Setup menu) .................................69
ZoneB Trim (Option menu) .......................61
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE161B0/EN
En 1
This product uses the following free software.
For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below.
■ About ASN.1 object dumping code
ASN.1 object dumping code, copyright Peter Gutmann
<pgut001@cs.auckland.ac.nz>, based on ASN.1 dump
program by David Kemp <dpkemp@missi.ncsc.mil>,
with contributions from various people including
Matthew Hamrick <hamrick@rsa.com>, Bruno Couillard
<bcouillard@chrysalis-its.com>, Hallvard Furuseth
<h.b.furuseth@usit.uio.no>, Geoff Thorpe
<geoff@raas.co.nz>, David Boyce
<d.boyce@isode.com>, John Hughes
<john.hughes@entegrity.com>, Life is hard, and then
you die <ronald@trustpoint.com>, Hans-Olof
Hermansson <hans-olof.hermansson@postnet.se>, Tor
Rustad <Tor.Rustad@bbs.no>, Kjetil Barvik
<kjetil.barvik@bbs.no>, James Sweeny
<jsweeny@us.ibm.com>, and several other people
whose names I've misplaced.
This code grew slowly over time without much design or
planning, with features being tacked on as required.
It's not representative of my normal coding style.
■ About FLAC codec Library
Copyright ©
2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007,2008,2009
Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
■ About libexpat
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source
Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat
maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Information about software
English
En 2
■ About The Independent JPEG
Group’s JPEG software
The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software
Copyright © 1991-2010, Thomas G. Lane, Guido
Vollbeding.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied, with respect to this software,
its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a
particular purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”,
and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality
and accuracy.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any
purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is
distributed, then this README file must be
included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice
unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes
to the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying documentation must state that “this
software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group”.
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if
the user accepts full responsibility for any
undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO
LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or
based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified
library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge
us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG
author's name or company name in advertising or
publicity relating to this software or products derived
from it. This software may be referred to only as “the
Independent JPEG Group’s software”.
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this
software as the basis of commercial products, provided
that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the
product vendor.
■ About JsonCpp
Copyright © 2007-2010 Baptiste Lepilleur
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
■ About Ogg/Vorbis
Copyright © 2002-2008 Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
– Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
– Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE161A0/SLEN
■ About RC4 Algorithm
Copyright Mocana Corp 2003-2005. All Rights
Reserved.
Proprietary and Confidential Material.
■ About zlib Library
Copyright notice:
© 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or
implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held
liable for any damages arising from the use of this
software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for
any purpose, including commercial applications, and to
alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote
the original software. If you use this software in a
product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not
required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as
such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any
source distribution.
Do not disassemble, decompile, or reverse engineer
the software included in Yamaha AV products.
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
The following cables (not supplied) are required to build the system described in this
document.
• Speaker cables (depending on the number of speakers)
• HDMI cable (x2)
• Audio pin cable (x1)
• Digital optical cable (x1) (not required if your TV supports ARC [Audio Return Channel])
1Preparation
Accessories
Remote control Batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
Insert the batteries the right way round.
AM antenna FM antenna YPAO microphone
CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)
Safety Brochure Easy Setup Guide
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this guide are of the RX-V573 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.
*The supplied FM antenna
varies depending on the
region of purchase.
Cables required for connections
Easy Setup Guide
English
AV Receiver
This document explains how to set up a 5.1- or 7.1-channel system (RX-V573
only) and play back surround sound from a BD/DVD on the unit.
To reduce the impact on natural resources, the Owner’s Manual for this product is
supplied on CD-ROM. For more information about this product, refer to the
Owner’s Manual on the supplied CD-ROM.
PDF versions of this guide and “Owner’s Manual” can be downloaded from the
following website.
http://download.yamaha.com/
[For U.S. customers only]
Visit the following website for additional information, FAQ’s, downloads such as
“Owner’s Manual” and product updates.
http://usa.yamaha.com/support/
UAB
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 1 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
2En
Set up the speakers in the room using the following diagram as a reference.
For information on other speaker systems, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.
1Front speaker (L)
2Front speaker (R)
3Center speaker
4Surround speaker (L)
5Surround speaker (R)
6Surround back speaker (L)
7Surround back speaker (R)
9Subwoofer
2Placing speakers
5.1-channel system
12
39
45
10° to 30°10° to 30°
7.1-channel system
(RX-V573 only)
45
12
39
67
30 cm (1 ft) or more
10° to 30° 10° to 30°
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 2 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
En 3
■Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the
negative (–) terminals of the unit and the speaker, and the
other is for the positive (+) terminals. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminals.
aRemove approximately 10
mm (3/8”) of insulation
from the ends of the
speaker cable and twist
the bare wires of the cable
firmly together.
bLoosen the speaker terminal.
cInsert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
dTighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Australia and General
models only)
aTighten the speaker
terminal.
bInsert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
1Connect the front speakers (1/2)
to the FRONT (//\) terminals. 2Connect the center speaker (3) to the
CENTER terminal.
3Connecting speakers/subwoofer
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm
speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s
speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the
speaker impedance” in “Owner’s Manual”.
• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω.
• Use a subwoofer equipped with built-in amplifier.
• Before connecting the speakers, remove the unit’s power cable
from the AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
each other or come into contact with the unit’s metal areas. This
may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables
short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display
when the unit is turned on.
FRONT
aa
b
d
c
– (black)
+ (red)
FRONT
a
b
Banana plug
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 3 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
4En
3Connect the surround speakers (4/
5) to the SURROUND (//\)
terminals.
4Connect the subwoofer (9) to the
SUBWOOFER jack. Connect the surround back speakers (6/
7) to the SURROUND BACK (//\)
terminals.
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
12
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
12
3
45
9
Audio pin cable
The unit (rear)
For 7.1-channel system (RX-V573 only)
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
OR OUT
P
B
Y
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
1
67
2
3
45
9
The unit (rear)
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 4 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
En 5
4Connecting external devices
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
SINGLE
SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
AV 1 AV 2AV 3 AV 5 AV 6
OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL
( TV )
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
VIDEO
AV
MONITOR OUT
OUT AUDIO
AV 4
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2 HDMI 3
HDMI 4
NETWORK
HDMI
OUT
ARC
FM
ANTENNA
AM
SUBWOOFER
SPEAKERS
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM AM
TUNING
CONTROL
TV
BD
DVD
NET
RADIO
INPUT
SCENE
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
STRAIGHT
VIDEO
DIRECT
iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A
AUDIO
VIDEO
VOLUME
AUX USB
TONE
PROGRAM
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
110V
-
120V
220V
-
240V
HDMIOPTICAL
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
OUT
ARC
HDMI HDMI
HDMI
O
AV 4
OPTICAL
(TV)
O
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
a
cb
d
TV
Audio out
(optical) HDMI in HDMI out
BD/DVD player
HDMI OUT
jack
HDMI 1 jack
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack
The unit (rear)
To an AC wall
outlet
Turn on the unit
The unit (front)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
1Connect external devices to the unit.
aConnect a BD/DVD player to the unit with an HDMI
cable.
If the BD/DVD player is currently connected to the
TV directly with an HDMI cable, disconnect the
cable from the TV and connect it to this unit.
bConnect a TV to the unit with the other HDMI cable.
cConnect a TV to the unit with a digital optical cable.
This connection is required to play back TV audio
on the unit. This connection is not required if your
TV supports ARC (Audio Return Channel).
dConnect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
• For information on how to connect radio antennas or other
external devices, see “PREPARATIONS” in “Owner’s Manual”.
2Turn on the unit, the TV and the BD/DVD
player.
3Use the TV remote control to change the
TV input to video from the unit.
The connections are complete. Proceed to the next
page to optimize the speaker settings.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can
configure the unit’s settings with the menu displayed on the TV. In
addition, you can select the on-screen menu language from English
(default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese. For
details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”. In this guide, illustrations of
English menu screens are used as examples.
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Make sure you set the switch position of
VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz.
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 5 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
6En
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the
distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as
volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.
Preparing for YPAO
5
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
• During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at
night when it may be a nuisance to others.
• During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
• During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
• Do not connect headphones.
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
1Connect the YPAO microphone to the
YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
The following screen appears.
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or
use the cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before
starting the measurement.
2To start the measurement, press SETUP.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds.
The following screen appears on the TV when
the measurement finishes.
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Press SETUP key
to Start
Power Amp Assign
Basic
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
[SETUP]:Start
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
Finished
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
RETURN
V
O
LUME
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
DISPL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
TUNING
S
TRAI
GH
T
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NE
T
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
1
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
The unit (front)
Place the YPAO microphone at your
listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a
tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to fix the
microphone in place.
YPAO microphone
Listening position
Ear height
Cursor keys
ENTER
Turn on the subwoofer and set
the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is
adjustable, set it to maximum.
SETUP
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 6 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
En 7
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such
as W-2) appears, see “Error messages” or “Warning
messages” in “Owner’s Manual”.
• If the warning message “W-1:Out of Phase” appears, see “If
“W-1:Out of Phase” appears”.
3Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select
“SAVE” (Save) and press ENTER.
4Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Follow the procedure below to check the speaker
connections.
Depending on the type of speakers or room
environment, this message may appear even if the
speakers are connected correctly.
aCheck for the blinking of the front display’s indicator to
identify the problem speaker.
bCheck the cable connections (+/-) of the problem
speaker.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
You can save the current settings.
Proceed to step 3.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable, and then
try YPAO measurement again.
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be
placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or
high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment).
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
SAVE
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
>SaveCancel
If “W-1:Out of Phase” appears
Warning
message
Auto Setup
Start
Exit
Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB
W-1:Out of Phase
VOL.
SW
L
SL
C
SR
R
W-1:PHASE
Problem speaker (blinks)
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 7 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation Printed in Malaysia ZA52610
Now let’s play back a BD/DVD.
We recommend playing back multichannel audio
(5.1-channel or more) to feel surround sound produced
by the unit.
1Press HDMI 1 to select “HDMI 1” as the
input source.
2Start playback on the BD/DVD player.
3Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“STRAIGHT”.
• When “STRAIGHT” (straight decode) is enabled, each
speaker produces each channel audio signal directly (without
sound field processing).
• (RX-V573 only)
If you play back 5.1-channel audio on the 7.1-channel system,
no sounds will be heard from the surround back speakers.
4Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
This completes the basic setup procedure.
Sound is only being output from the front speakers
during multichannel audio playback
Check the digital audio output setting on the BD/DVD
player.
It may be set to 2-channel output (such as PCM).
No sound is coming from a specific speaker
See “Troubleshooting” in “Owner’s Manual”.
6Playing back a BD/DVD
SCENE
RETURN
VOLUME
ENHANCER
DIRECT
HDMI
AV
FM
INFO
MEMORY
AM
PRESET
MOVIE MUSIC
BD
DVD
MUTE
ENTER
TV
TV VOL TV CH
TOP
MENU
POP-UP
MENU
DISPLAY
SOURCE
RECEIVER
CODE SET
OPTION
SETUP
TUNING
STRAIGHT
SUR. DECODE
INPUT
MUTE
9 0
10
ENT
56 87
1234
MODE
TV
NET
RADIO
TUNER
1 2 3
NET
USB
V-AUX
6
A
B
ZONE
5
4
1 2 3 4
SLEEP
AUDIO
SC
EN
E
R
ETURN
E
NHANCE
R
D
IREC
T
HDMI
AV
FM
I
NF
O
M
EM
O
RY
AM
P
RESET
M
O
VIE
MUSI
C
BD
DV
D
M
UT
E
ENTER
TV
TV
V
O
L
TV
C
H
T
O
P
MEN
U
POP-U
P
MEN
U
D
I
S
PL
AY
SOU
R
CE
R
E
C
EIVER
CO
DE
S
ET
O
PTI
O
N
S
ETUP
TUNING
S
UR
.
D
E
CO
D
E
INP
U
T
MUTE
9
0
10
EN
T
6
5
8
7
1
2
3
4
MOD
E
TV
NET
RADI
O
TUNE
R
1
2
3
NE
T
US
B
V-AU
X
6
A
B
Z
O
NE
5
4
2
3
4
S
LEE
P
AUDI
O
HDMI 1
STRAIGHT
VOLUME
If surround sound is not working
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
HDMI1
VOL.
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
VOL.
STRAIGHT
SW
C
L
SL SR
R
Volume -30.0dB
VOL.
Many more features!
The unit has various other functions.
Please refer to “Owner’s Manual” on the supplied
CD-ROM to help you get the most out of the unit.
Connecting other playback
devices
Connect audio devices (such as CD player),
game consoles, camcorders, and many others.
Selecting the sound mode
Select the desired sound program (CINEMA
DSP) or surround decoder suitable for movies,
music, games, sports programs, and other uses.
Playing back from iPod
By using a USB cable supplied with iPod, you
can enjoy iPod music on the unit.
■
Listening to FM/AM radio
■Playing back music stored on
a USB storage device
■
Playing back the network
contents
■
Selecting the input source and
favorite settings at once
For more information, see “What you can do
with the unit”.
RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 8 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
1
TV
A.R. Systems 0320
Acme 0342
Acura 0323, 0343
ADC 0337
Admiral 0054, 0178, 0336, 0337,
0339, 0346, 0347
Advent 0158
Adventura 0057
Adyson 0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi 0277, 0282
Agazi 0337
Aiko 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343
Aim 0320
Aiwa 0078, 0379
Akai 0050, 0055, 0109, 0159,
0181, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Akiba 0320, 0340
Akura 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340
Alaron 0277
Alba 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0351, 0372, 0382
Albatron 0140
Alcyon 0171
Alleron 0059
Allorgan 0282
Allstar 0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi 0276
Amplivision 0161, 0282, 0321, 0342
Amstrad 0320, 0323, 0337, 0340,
0343
Amtron 0058
Anam 0179, 0343
Anam National 0052, 0058
Anglo 0323, 0343
Anitech 0171, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0343
Ansonic 0161, 0168, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0343
AOC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053
Apex 0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam 0277, 0282
Arcam Delta 0342
Aristona 0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA 0339, 0347
Asberg 0171, 0320, 0350
Astra 0343
Asuka 0277, 0282, 0337, 0340,
0342
Atlantic 0277, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Atori 0323, 0343
Auchan 0321
Audiosonic 0161, 0282, 0320, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
AudioTon 0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox 0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind 0171
Autovox 0171, 0282, 0337, 0339,
0342
Aventura 0051
Awa 0277, 0282
Axion 0156
Baird 0282
Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339
Basic Line 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Bastide 0282, 0342
Baur 0320, 0349
Bazin 0282
Beko 0161, 0269, 0294, 0302,
0311, 0320, 0328, 0351
Belcor 0008
Bell & Howell 0019, 0054
Benq 0097, 0242, 0361
Beon 0320, 0349, 0350
Best 0161
Bestar 0161, 0320, 0350
Binatone 0282, 0342
Blue Sky 0320, 0340
Blue Star 0348
Boots 0282, 0342
BPL 0320, 0348
Bradford 0058, 0179
Brandt 0322, 0345
Brillian 0182
Brinkmann 0320
Brionvega 0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
Britannia 0277, 0282, 0342
Brockwood 0008
Broksonic 0109, 0179
Bruns 0339
BTC 0340
Bush 0269, 0282, 0283, 0304,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0332,
0340, 0343, 0344, 0346,
0348, 0349, 0350, 0372,
0382, 0463, 0470, 0472
byd:sign 0093
Candle 0008, 0026, 0050, 0057
Capsonic 0337
Carena 0320
Carnivale 0050
Carrefour 0344
Carver 0010
Cascade 0320, 0323, 0343
Casio 0367
Cathay 0320, 0349, 0350
CCE 0183, 0282
Celebrity 0055, 0107
Celera 0039
Centurion 0320, 0349, 0350
Century 0339
CGE 0161, 0171
Changhong 0039
Chimei 0273
Cimline 0323, 0343
Citizen 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0058
City 0323, 0343
Clarion 0179
Clarivox 0349
Clatronic 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0351
CMS 0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby 0197
Colortyme 0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto 0008, 0026
Concorde 0323, 0343
Condor 0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0350, 0351
Contec 0179, 0277, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344
Contec/Cony 0012, 0058
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel 0323, 0343
Craig 0058, 0179
Crosley 0010, 0037, 0171, 0339
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Elenco dei codici di telecomando
Lista de códigos de mando a distancia
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Liste over fjernbetjeningskoder
Liste over fjernkontrollkoder
2
Crown 0058, 0161, 0171, 0179,
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX 0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019,
0021, 0026, 0049, 0050,
0178
CXC 0058, 0179
Cybertron 0340
Cytron 0152
Daewoo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0037,
0053, 0167, 0266, 0275,
0277, 0282, 0315, 0320,
0323, 0331, 0335, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0381, 0465
Dainichi 0277, 0340
Dansai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0349, 0350
Dantax 0161, 0349
Dawa 0320
Daytron 0007, 0008, 0026, 0323,
0343
De Graaf 0346
Decca 0282, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Dell 0145, 0245
Denver 0358, 0362
Desmet 0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant 0320
Diamond 0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia 0049
Disney 0219
Dixi 0282, 0320, 0323, 0343,
0349, 0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS 0323, 0343
Dual 0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec 0342, 0343
Dumont 0008, 0030, 0062, 0282,
0339, 0341, 0342
Durabrand 0031, 0051, 0179, 0215
Dux 0349
Dwin 0178
Dynatron 0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex 0228, 0231
EIZO 0509
Elbe 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320
Elcit 0339
Electa 0348
ELECTRO TECH
0343
Electroband 0055, 0107
Electrograph 0176
Electrohome 0008, 0026, 0052, 0055
Element 0230
Elin 0277, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0349, 0350
Elite 0320, 0340, 0350
Elman 0341
Elta 0277, 0323, 0343
Emerson 0000, 0007, 0008, 0012,
0013, 0019, 0026, 0031,
0037, 0051, 0058, 0059,
0161, 0179, 0320, 0339
Emprex 0154
Envision 0008, 0026, 0050
Epson 0155, 0206, 0359
Erres 0320, 0349, 0350
ESA 0051
ESC 0282
Etron 0343
Eurofeel 0282
Euro-Feel 0337
Euroline 0349
Euroman 0161, 0277, 0282
Euromann 0320, 0337, 0342, 0350
Europhon 0277, 0282, 0320, 0341,
0342, 0350
Expert 0321
Exquisit 0320
Fenner 0323, 0343
Ferguson 0322, 0345, 0349
Fidelity 0277, 0320, 0342, 0346
Filsai 0282
Finlandia 0346
Finlux 0171, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0341, 0342, 0349, 0350
FIRST LINE 0342, 0343, 0350
Firstline 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Fisher 0019, 0161, 0282, 0339,
0342, 0344, 0351
Flint 0320, 0350
Formenti 0171, 0277, 0336, 0339,
0342, 0349
Formenti/Phoenix
0277
Fortress 0336, 0339
Fraba 0161, 0320
Friac 0161
Frontech 0282, 0323, 0337, 0343,
0346, 0347
Fujitsu 0059, 0069, 0074, 0075,
0282
Fujitsu General 0282
Fujitsu Siemens 0504, 0505, 0507, 0510,
0511
Funai 0051, 0058, 0059, 0112,
0113, 0115, 0118, 0119,
0179, 0337, 0488, 0489
Futuretech 0058, 0179
Galaxi 0320, 0351
Galaxis 0161, 0320
Gateway 0176, 0177, 0241
GBC 0323, 0343, 0344
GE 0008, 0021, 0023, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0034, 0049,
0052, 0056, 0209
Geant Casino 0321
GEC 0282, 0320, 0342, 0347,
0349, 0350
Geloso 0323, 0343, 0346
General Technic 0323, 0343
Genexxa 0320, 0340, 0347, 0350
GFM 0128, 0227
Giant 0282
Gibralter 0008, 0030, 0050, 0062
GoldHand 0277
Goldline 0320
GoldStar 0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0031, 0050, 0053, 0161,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0346, 0349,
0350
Goodmans 0246, 0272, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350, 0462, 0473,
0477
Gorenje 0161, 0351
GPM 0340
GPX 0129
Gradiente 0240
Graetz 0347
Granada 0171, 0282, 0320, 0321,
0342, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350
Grandin 0340, 0343, 0348, 0349
Gronic 0282
Grundig 0160, 0161, 0171, 0310,
0320
Grunpy 0058, 0059, 0179
Haier 0157, 0233
Halifax 0277, 0282, 0337, 0342
Hallmark 0008, 0026, 0031
Hampton 0277, 0282, 0342
Hanseatic 0161, 0168, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350
Hantarex 0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor 0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard 0058, 0179
Harwood 0320, 0323
Havermy 0178
HCM 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0348
Hema 0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi 0277
HiLine 0320
Hinari 0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0344, 0349, 0350
Hisawa 0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense 0247
Hitachi 0008, 0012, 0026, 0066,
0084, 0092, 0093, 0120,
0172, 0173, 0255, 0270,
0271, 0282, 0320, 0335,
0338, 0342, 0344, 0346,
0347, 0365, 0382, 0448,
0456, 0467, 0482, 0484,
0487
Hornyphon 0320, 0350
Hoshai 0340
Huanyu 0277, 0342
Hygashi 0277, 0282, 0342
Hyper 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342,
0343
Hypson 0282, 0320, 0321, 0337,
0342, 0348, 0349, 0350
Hyundai 0141
Iberia 0320
ICE 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343,
0350
ICeS 0277
Ilo 0148, 0153
IMA 0058
Imperial 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350, 0351
3
Indiana 0320, 0349, 0350
Infinity 0010
InFocus 0250, 0327, 0363, 0479,
0508
Ingelen 0347
Ingersol 0323, 0343
Initial 0153
Inno Hit 0171, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
Innovation 0337, 0343
Insignia 0131, 0228, 0236, 0238
Inteq 0030
Interactive 0161
Interbuy 0323, 0343
Interfunk 0161, 0320, 0339, 0347,
0349, 0350
International 0277
Intervision 0161, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0341, 0342
Irradio 0171, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0349, 0350
Isukai 0320, 0340
ITC 0282, 0342
ITS 0277, 0320, 0340, 0348,
0350
ITT 0343, 0347
ITV 0320, 0343, 0349
Janeil 0057
JBL 0010
JC Penney 0007, 0008, 0026, 0027,
0049, 0053, 0056
JCB 0055, 0107
Jensen 0008, 0026
JVC 0012, 0014, 0015, 0056,
0064, 0065, 0067, 0169,
0174, 0297, 0314, 0344,
0350, 0375
Kaisui 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0348
Kamosonic 0342
Kamp 0277, 0342
Kapsch 0347
Karcher 0161, 0320, 0342, 0343,
0349
Kawasho 0008, 0026, 0055, 0277
KEC 0179
Kendo 0161, 0320, 0341, 0346
Kenwood 0008, 0026, 0050
KIC 0282
Kingsley 0277, 0342
KLH 0039
Kloss Novabeam
0057, 0058
Kneissel 0161, 0168, 0320
Kolster 0320, 0350
Konka 0340
Korpel 0320, 0349, 0350
Korting 0161, 0339
Kosmos 0320
Koyoda 0343
KTV 0007, 0050, 0058, 0179,
0183, 0282, 0342
Kyoto 0277, 0282
Lasat 0161
Lenco 0323, 0343
Lenoir 0323, 0342, 0343
Leyco 0320, 0337, 0349, 0350
LG 0031, 0053, 0066, 0116,
0117, 0140, 0161, 0164,
0175, 0195, 0269, 0277,
0282, 0300, 0309, 0317,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0342,
0343, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0366, 0368, 0377, 0466,
0471, 0478
LG/GoldStar 0164
Liesenk 0349
Liesenkotter 0320
Life 0337, 0343
Lifetec 0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
Lloyds 0323
Loewe 0161, 0168, 0265, 0320,
0330, 0352
Loewe Opta 0339, 0349, 0350
Logik 0054
Luma 0320, 0323, 0346, 0349
Lumatron 0282, 0320, 0346, 0349,
0350
Lux May 0350
Luxman 0008, 0026
Luxor 0282, 0342, 0346
LXI 0010, 0019, 0021, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0049, 0111
M Electronic 0342, 0343, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350
MAG 0096
Magnadyne 0339, 0341, 0349
Magnafon 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
Magnavox 0008, 0009, 0010, 0013,
0026, 0032, 0033, 0048,
0050, 0128, 0211, 0212,
0224, 0226, 0239
Magnum 0337, 0343
Majestic 0054
Mandor 0337
Manesth 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Marantz 0008, 0010, 0026, 0050,
0204, 0320, 0349, 0350
Marelli 0339
Mark 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0349, 0350
Masuda 0282
Matsui 0282, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350, 0455
Matsushita 0017
Maxent 0147, 0176
Mediator 0320, 0349, 0350
Medion 0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower 0140
Megatron 0026, 0031
MElectronic 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Melvox 0321
Memorex 0019, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0054, 0137, 0215, 0323,
0343
Memphis 0323, 0343
Mercury 0320, 0323
Metz 0339
MGA 0008, 0026, 0031, 0050,
0053
Micromaxx 0337, 0343
Microstar 0337, 0343
Midland 0007, 0021, 0023, 0027,
0030, 0056, 0062
Minerva 0171
Minoka 0320, 0350
Mintek 0153
Mitsubishi 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0066, 0084, 0093, 0098,
0150, 0178, 0289, 0320,
0339, 0344, 0350, 0376
Mivar 0161, 0168, 0171, 0277,
0282, 0342
Monivision 0140
Montgomery Ward
0054
Motion 0171
Motorola 0052, 0178
MTC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0161, 0277
Multi System 0349
Multitech 0058, 0161, 0179, 0183,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349
Murphy 0277, 0342
NAD 0026, 0031, 0111
Naonis 0346
NEC 0008, 0026, 0050, 0052,
0053, 0072, 0103, 0282,
0344
Neckermann 0161, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0342, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0351
NEI 0320, 0349, 0350
Net-TV 0176
Neufunk 0320, 0323
New Tech 0343, 0350
New World 0340
NewTech 0282, 0320, 0323
Nicamagic 0277, 0342
Nikkai 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350
Nikko 0026, 0031, 0050
Nobliko 0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
Nokia 0347
Norcent 0201
Nordic 0282
Nordmende 0339, 0345, 0347, 0350
Nordvision 0349
Novatronic 0320
Oceanic 0321, 0347
Okano 0161, 0320, 0351
Olevia 0102, 0199, 0200, 0207,
0222
ONCEAS 0342
Onwa 0058, 0179
Opera 0320
Oppo 0130
Optimus 0017, 0019
Optoma 0144
Optonica 0178
Orbit 0320, 0350
4
Orion 0043, 0146, 0283, 0320,
0323, 0328, 0343, 0349,
0350
Orline 0320
Osaki 0282, 0320, 0337, 0340,
0342
Oso 0340
Otto Versand 0282, 0320, 0336, 0342,
0344, 0348, 0349, 0350
Pael 0277, 0342
Palladium 0161, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0351
Palsonic 0282
Panama 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343
Panasonic 0016, 0017, 0020, 0022,
0023, 0035, 0052, 0056,
0084, 0085, 0133, 0163,
0193, 0284, 0286, 0290,
0292, 0320, 0325, 0347,
0356, 0483, 0485, 0490
Panavision 0320
Pathe Cinema 0161, 0168, 0277, 0321,
0342
Pausa 0323, 0343
Penney 0021, 0023, 0031, 0050,
0111
Perdio 0277, 0320
Perfekt 0320
Philco 0008, 0009, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0050, 0052, 0053,
0161, 0171, 0320, 0339
Philharmonic 0282, 0342
Philips 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0012, 0032, 0048, 0049,
0052, 0122, 0128, 0134,
0186, 0187, 0213, 0221,
0224, 0226, 0239, 0256,
0257, 0259, 0261, 0263,
0267, 0280, 0281, 0287,
0296, 0299, 0301, 0303,
0305, 0313, 0319, 0320,
0324, 0333, 0339, 0342,
0349, 0350, 0353, 0357,
0360, 0380, 0383, 0452,
0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox
0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix 0161, 0277, 0320, 0339,
0349, 0350
Phonola 0277, 0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Pilot 0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer 0008, 0026, 0094, 0095,
0161, 0320, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0458, 0480
Plantron 0320, 0323, 0337, 0350
Playsonic 0282
Polaroid 0039, 0142, 0202, 0234
Poppy 0323, 0343
Portland 0007, 0008, 0026, 0053
Prandoni-Prince
0171, 0346
Precision 0282, 0342
Prima 0157, 0243, 0323, 0343,
0347
Princeton 0140
Prism 0023, 0056
Profex 0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic 0320, 0350
Proline 0320, 0350
Proscan 0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349
Protech 0282, 0337, 0341, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Proton 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031
Protron 0196
PROVIEW 0096, 0246
Provision 0320, 0349
Pulsar 0008, 0030, 0062
Pye 0256, 0320, 0349, 0350,
0378
Pymi 0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar 0017, 0023, 0052, 0056
Quelle 0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Questa 0344
Radialva 0320
RadioShack 0019, 0021, 0031, 0050,
0179, 0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0049, 0058
Radiola 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Radiomarelli 0320, 0339
Radiotone 0161, 0320, 0323, 0350
Rank 0344
RCA 0008, 0021, 0024, 0025,
0026, 0027, 0042, 0049,
0052, 0053, 0063, 0136,
0225
Realistic 0019, 0031, 0050, 0179
Recor 0320
Redstar 0320
Reflex 0320
Revox 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Rex 0337, 0346, 0347
RFT 0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody 0277
R-Line 0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar 0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Robotron 0339
Rowa 0277, 0282
Royal Lux 0161
RTF 0339
Runco 0030, 0050, 0062
Saba 0298, 0322, 0339, 0345,
0347
Saisho 0282, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343
Salora 0346, 0347
Sambers 0171, 0341
Sampo 0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0176
Samsung 0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0036, 0050, 0053, 0076,
0077, 0079, 0114, 0124,
0125, 0126, 0127, 0139,
0161, 0183, 0185, 0190,
0191, 0258, 0264, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323, 0334,
0337, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351, 0373, 0453,
0468
Sandra 0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui 0043, 0109, 0320, 0350
Sanyo 0008, 0019, 0068, 0070,
0071, 0099, 0161, 0168,
0223, 0237, 0277, 0282,
0288, 0295, 0323, 0342,
0344, 0369, 0469
SBR 0320, 0349
Sceptre 0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347
Schneider 0282, 0316, 0318, 0320,
0333, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350, 0382
Scotch 0026, 0031
Scott 0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0058, 0059, 0149, 0179
Sears 0008, 0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0027, 0031, 0049,
0051, 0059, 0111
SEG 0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0341, 0342, 0344,
0349, 0382
SEI 0320
SEI-Sinudyne 0339, 0341, 0347
Seleco 0344, 0346, 0347
Sencora 0323, 0343
Sentra 0323
Serino 0277
Sharp 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003,
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0060, 0088, 0089, 0091,
0138, 0165, 0170, 0178,
0198, 0229, 0262, 0278,
0279, 0291, 0308, 0312,
0336, 0344, 0354, 0370,
0449, 0450, 0451, 0464,
0474, 0476, 0481
Sheng Chia 0178
Shogun 0008
Siarem 0320, 0339, 0341
Sierra 0320, 0350
Siesta 0161
Signature 0054
Silva 0277
Silver 0344
Singer 0321, 0339, 0341
Sinudyne 0320, 0339, 0341, 0349
Skantic 0347
Solavox 0347
Sonitron 0161, 0282
Sonoko 0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
Sonolor 0321, 0347
Sontec 0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
5
Sony 0038, 0044, 0045, 0047,
0055, 0090, 0104, 0105,
0107, 0110, 0123, 0184,
0220, 0248, 0249, 0251,
0252, 0254, 0326, 0343,
0344, 0371, 0374, 0457,
0475, 0486
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign 0008, 0026, 0031, 0058,
0059, 0179
Soundwave 0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview 0051
SSS 0008, 0058, 0179
Standard 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0350
Starlite 0058, 0179, 0320, 0323,
0349
Stenway 0348
Stern 0346, 0347
Strato 0320, 0323
Stylandia 0282
Sunkai 0343
Sunstar 0320, 0323
Sunwood 0320, 0323, 0343, 0350
Superla 0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan 0013, 0178
SuperTech 0277, 0320, 0323
Supra 0323, 0343
Supre-Macy 0057
Supreme 0055, 0107
Susumu 0340
Sutron 0323, 0343
SVA 0151
Sydney 0277, 0282, 0342
Sylvania 0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0013, 0026, 0048, 0050,
0051, 0128, 0227, 0253
Symphonic 0051, 0058, 0062, 0128,
0179, 0215
Syntax 0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline 0349
Sytong 0277
Tandy 0178, 0282, 0336, 0340,
0342, 0347
Tashiko 0277, 0282, 0342, 0344,
0346
Tatung 0052, 0177, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349, 0350
TCM 0337, 0343
Teac 0282, 0320
Tec 0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
Technics 0017, 0023, 0056
TechniSat 0274, 0496, 0497, 0499
Techwood 0008, 0023, 0026, 0056
TEDELEX 0282
Teknika 0007, 0008, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0053, 0054, 0058,
0059, 0179
Teleavia 0345
Telecor 0282, 0320
Telefunken 0320, 0322, 0345, 0350
Telegazi 0320
Telemeister 0320
Telesonic 0320
Telestar 0320
Teletech 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Teleton 0282, 0342
Televideon 0277
Televiso 0321
Tensai 0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Tesmet 0350
Tevion 0337, 0343
Texet 0277, 0282, 0323, 0342
Thomson 0162, 0188, 0189, 0285,
0320, 0322, 0342, 0345,
0350
Thorn 0320, 0349
TMK 0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi 0030
Tokai 0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo 0277, 0342
Tomashi 0348
Toshiba 0018, 0019, 0040, 0041,
0046, 0073, 0100, 0103,
0108, 0109, 0111, 0121,
0132, 0166, 0208, 0210,
0214, 0217, 0260, 0268,
0282, 0283, 0293, 0304,
0306, 0307, 0329, 0344,
0355, 0454, 0491
Totevision 0007
Towada 0282, 0347
Trakton 0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec 0277
Trident 0282
Triumph 0320
Uher 0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350
Ultravox 0277, 0320, 0339, 0341,
0342
Unic Line 0320
United 0349
Universum 0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0349, 0350, 0351
Univox 0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel 0282, 0320, 0346, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0351
Vexa 0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Victor 0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique 0277, 0282, 0340, 0342
VideoSystem 0320, 0350
Videotechnic 0277, 0282
Vidikron 0010
Vidtech 0008, 0026, 0031, 0053
Viewsonic 0176, 0203, 0232, 0364
Viking 0057
Viore 0148
Visiola 0277, 0342
Vision 0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio 0008, 0177, 0218, 0242,
0500, 0501, 0502, 0503,
0506
Vortec 0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson 0171, 0320, 0339, 0346,
0347, 0350
Waltham 0282, 0320, 0342
Wards 0008, 0009, 0010, 0026,
0031, 0048, 0049, 0050,
0053, 0054, 0059
Watson 0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio 0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon 0111
Wega 0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox 0323
Weltblick 0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220
White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277, 0320,
0341, 0342, 0349
Wincom 0101, 0106
Xrypton 0320
Yamaha 0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0080, 0081, 0082, 0083,
0086, 0087
Yamishi 0282, 0320
Yokan 0320
Yoko 0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Yorx 0340
Zanussi 0282, 0346
Zenith 0008, 0028, 0029, 0030,
0031, 0054, 0061, 0062
VCR
ABS 1016
Adventura 1069
Adyson 1008
Aiwa 1024, 1026, 1027, 1069
Akai 1021, 1027
Akiba 1008, 1029
Akura 1008, 1027, 1029
Alba 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Alienware 1016
Ambassador 1030
American High 1068
Amstrad 1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech 1008, 1029
Apex 1088
ASA 1028, 1031
Asha 1070
Asuka 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic 1009
Audiovox 1071
Baird 1009, 1025, 1026, 1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Baur 1028
Beaumark 1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar 1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt 1028
Bondstec 1008, 1030
Broksonic 1100
6
Bush 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1049, 1051, 1063,
1217
Calix 1071
Candle 1070, 1071
Canon 1068
Cathay 1009
Catron 1030
CGE 1026, 1027
Cimline 1008, 1024, 1029
CineVision 1104
Citizen 1070, 1071
Clatronic 1008, 1030
Colortyme 1064
Condor 1009, 1025, 1030
Craig 1070, 1071
Crown 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex 1070
CyberPower 1016
Daewoo 1009, 1025, 1030, 1038,
1069, 1223
Dansai 1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax 1024
Daytron 1009, 1025
DBX 1064
De Graaf 1028
Decca 1026, 1027, 1028
Dell 1016
Denko 1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion 1014
DIRECTV 1019, 1105, 1110, 1111,
1113, 1116, 1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro 1018
Dual 1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont 1026, 1028
Durabrand 1114
Dynatech 1069
Echostar 1018
Elbe 1009
Elcatech 1008
Electrohome 1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay 1008
Elta 1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson 1008, 1020, 1068, 1069,
1071
ESC 1009, 1025
Etzuko 1008, 1029
Expressvu 1018
Ferguson 1027
Fidelity 1008, 1026
Finlandia 1028
Finlux 1026, 1027, 1028
Firstline 1008, 1024, 1029, 1031
Fisher 1065
Flint 1024
Formenti/Phoenix
1028
Frontech 1030
Fuji 1068
Fujitsu 1026
Funai 1026, 1069
Galaxy 1026
Garrard 1069
Gateway 1016
GBC 1029, 1030
GE 1068, 1070
GEC 1028
Geloso 1029
General 1030
General Technic 1024
GOI 1018
GoldHand 1008, 1029
Goldstar 1026, 1031, 1064, 1071
Goodmans 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Gradiente 1069
Graetz 1027
Granada 1028
Grandin 1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Grundig 1028, 1029
Hanseatic 1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood 1008
HCM 1008, 1029
Headquarter 1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
Hisawa 1024
Hitachi 1011, 1026, 1027, 1028,
1046, 1062
HNS 1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP 1016
HTS 1018
Hughes 1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax 1012, 1110, 1113
Hush 1016
Hypson 1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
iBUYPOWER 1016
Impego 1030
Imperial 1026
Inno Hit 1008, 1009, 1025, 1028,
1029, 1030
Innovation 1024
Instant Replay 1068
Interbuy 1008, 1031
Interfunk 1028
Intervision 1009, 1026
Irradio 1008, 1029, 1031
ITT 1027
ITV 1009, 1025, 1031
JC Penney 1064, 1065, 1068, 1070,
1071
JCL 1068
JVC 1007, 1018, 1027, 1039,
1064, 1065, 1066, 1067,
1078, 1089, 1092, 1093,
1094, 1095, 1113, 1208,
1209, 1212, 1213, 1215,
1218
Kaisui 1008, 1029
Karcher 1028
Kendo 1008, 1024, 1025, 1030
Kenwood 1027, 1064, 1065
Kodak 1068, 1071
Korpel 1008, 1029
Kyoto 1008
Lenco 1025
Leyco 1008, 1029
LG 1010, 1026, 1031, 1047,
1054, 1056, 1071, 1103,
1221
Lifetec 1024
Linksys 1016
Lloyd's 1069
Loewe Opta 1028, 1031
Logik 1008, 1029
Lumatron 1009, 1025
Luxor 1008
LXI 1071
M Electronic 1026
Magnavox 1020, 1068, 1114, 1126
Magnin 1071
Manesth 1008, 1029
Marantz 1028, 1064, 1065, 1068
Mark 1009
Marta 1071
Matsui 1024, 1031
Matsushita 1068
Media Center PC
1016
Mediator 1028
Medion 1024
MEI 1068
Memorex 1023, 1026, 1031, 1065,
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071,
1098, 1114
Memphis 1008, 1029
MGN Technology
1070
Micromaxx 1024
Microsoft 1016
Microstar 1024
Migros 1026
Mind 1016
Mitsubishi 1026, 1028, 1079
Motorola 1068
MTC 1070
Multitech 1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1030, 1069, 1070
Murphy 1026
NEC 1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann 1027, 1028
NEI 1028
Nesco 1008, 1029
Nikkai 1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko 1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex 1070
Nokia 1009, 1027
Nordmende 1027
Northgate 1016
Oceanic 1026, 1027
Okano 1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus 1068
Optimus 1071
Orion 1023, 1024, 1051, 1115,
1217
Orson 1026
Osaki 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Otto Versand 1028
Palladium 1008, 1027, 1029, 1031
7
Panasonic 1000, 1022, 1044, 1055,
1068, 1072, 1085, 1090,
1091, 1120, 1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio 1026
Philco 1008, 1068
Philips 1006, 1013, 1028, 1035,
1040, 1045, 1046, 1050,
1058, 1059, 1061, 1068,
1076, 1101, 1110, 1113,
1116, 1117, 1122, 1126,
1210, 1211
Philips Magnavox
1076
Phonola 1028
Pilot 1071
Pioneer 1028, 1036
Polaroid 1088, 1099
Portland 1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz 1026
Profex 1029
Proline 1026
Proscan 1019
Prosonic 1009, 1024
Pulsar 1114
Pye 1028, 1102
Quarter 1065
Quartz 1065
Quasar 1068
Quelle 1026, 1028
Radialva 1008
RadioShack 1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
Radiola 1028
Radix 1071
Randex 1071
RCA 1019, 1068, 1070, 1075,
1110, 1113, 1122, 1125
Realistic 1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
ReplayTV 1022, 1123
Rex 1027
RFT 1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision 1016
Roadstar 1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1031
Royal 1008
Runco 1114
Saba 1027
Saisho 1024, 1029
Samsung 1002, 1034, 1041, 1043,
1057, 1060, 1070, 1084,
1110, 1116, 1122, 1124,
1220, 1222
Samurai 1008, 1030
Sanky 1114
Sansui 1023, 1027, 1106, 1115
Sanyo 1032, 1065, 1070
Saville 1009
SBR 1028
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027
Schneider 1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1026, 1028, 1029, 1030,
1031
Sears 1065, 1068, 1071
SEG 1008, 1009, 1029
SEI-Sinudyne 1028
Seleco 1027
Sentra 1008, 1030
Sentron 1008, 1029
Sharp 1003, 1033, 1077, 1107,
1127, 1219
Shintom 1008, 1029
Shivaki 1031
Shogun 1070
Siemens 1031
Silva 1031
Silver 1009
Singer 1068
Sinudyne 1028
Solavox 1030
Sonic Blue 1022, 1123
Sonneclair 1008
Sonoko 1009, 1025
Sontec 1031
Sony 1001, 1016, 1048, 1053,
1073, 1074, 1080, 1081,
1082, 1083, 1108, 1118,
1216
Stack 1016
Stack 9 1016
Standard 1009, 1025
Stern 1009
STS 1068
Sunkai 1024
Sunstar 1026
Suntronic 1026
Sunwood 1008, 1029
Superscan 1020
Sylvania 1020, 1068, 1069, 1102,
1126
Symphonic 1008, 1069, 1126
Systemax 1016
Tagar Systems 1016
Taisho 1024
Tandberg 1009
Tandy 1065
Tashiko 1026, 1071
Tatung 1026, 1027, 1028
TCM 1015, 1024, 1042
Teac 1009, 1069
Tec 1008, 1009, 1030
Technics 1068
Teknika 1068, 1069, 1071
Teleavia 1027
Telefunken 1027
Teletech 1008, 1009
Tenosal 1008, 1029
Tensai 1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Tevion 1024
Thomson 1005, 1027
Thorn 1027
Tivo 1108, 1110, 1111, 1113,
1117, 1118, 1119, 1122
TMK 1070
Tokai 1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai 1029
Toshiba 1004, 1016, 1027, 1028,
1037, 1049, 1052, 1086,
1087, 1097, 1109, 1112,
1194
Totevision 1070, 1071
Touch 1016
Towada 1008, 1029
Towika 1008, 1029
TVA 1030
Uher 1031
UltimateTV 1019
Ultravox 1009
Unitech 1070
United Quick Star
1009, 1025
Universum 1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon 1024
Videosonic 1070
Viewsonic 1016
Voodoo 1016
Wards 1068, 1069, 1070, 1071
Weltblick 1031
XR-1000 1068, 1069
Yamaha 1064, 1065
Yamishi 1008, 1029
Yokan 1008, 1029
Yoko 1008, 1029, 1030, 1031
Zenith 1114
ZT Group 1016
DVD
4Kus 2051
Accurian 2142
Advent 2155, 2251
AEG 2362
Airis 2364
Aiwa 2322
Akai 2145, 2177, 2179, 2248
Akura 2356
Alba 2064, 2165, 2186, 2337,
2346
Alco 2149
Alize 2361
Allegro 2133
Amitech 2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW 2195, 2363
Apex 2030, 2124, 2125, 2126,
2127, 2130, 2131
Apple 2241
Arrgo 2138
Asono 2364
Aspire 2152, 2222
Astar 2240
ATACOM 2364
Audiovox 2061, 2149
Avious 2367
Awa 2 3 6 3
Axion 2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze 2367
BBK 2364
Bellagio 2363
Best Buy 2359
Blaupunkt 2131
Blue Parade 2157
Boghe 2382
Brainwave 2362
8
Brandt 2148, 2188
Broksonic 2145, 2146
Bush 2064, 2110, 2170, 2268,
2290, 2346, 2358, 2367,
2383
California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio
2354
CAT 2352, 2353
CAVS 2192
Centrum 2353
CGV 2354, 2362
Changhong 2140
Cinetec 2363
CineVision 2133, 2237
Clatronic 2358, 2367
Coby 2031, 2046, 2360
Conia 2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown 2362
C-Tech 2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG 2377
CyberHome 2022, 2098, 2138, 2187,
2336
Cytron 2244
Daenyx 2363
Daewoo 2001, 2133, 2276, 2298,
2330, 2362, 2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton 2357
Dansai 2362, 2381
Daytek 2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton 2363
DEC 2358
Decca 2362
Denon 2059, 2151, 2193, 2332
Denver 2356, 2358, 2360, 2370
Denzel 2380
Desay 2205
Diamond 2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney 2010, 2028
DK Digital 2339
Dmtech 2176
Dual 2380
DUNE 2473
Durabrand 2136
DVX 2355
Easy Home 2359
Eclipse 2354
E-Dem 2364
Electrohome 2362
Elin 2362
Elta 2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson 2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise 2129
Enzer 2380
Epson 2247
ESA 2137
Finlux 2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec 2377
Fisher 2134
Funai 2137
Gateway 2051
GE 2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom 2351
GFM 2226
Giec 2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video 2133, 2213
Goodmans 2165, 2280, 2291, 2358,
2371, 2376, 2382
GPX 2227
Gradiente 2151
Graetz 2380
Greenhill 2131
Grundig 2349
Grunkel 2362, 2366
GVG 2377
H&B 2358
H_her 2364
Haaz 2354, 2355
Haier 2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX 2359
Hitachi 2062, 2090, 2115, 2274,
2316, 2359, 2380
Hiteker 2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai 2366
Ilo 2245
Initial 2131, 2245
Innovation 2182
Insignia 2002, 2137, 2253
Integra 2157
Irradio 2053
iSymphony 2246
JBL 2135
JVC 2020, 2096, 2097, 2099,
2100, 2101, 2102, 2103,
2106, 2107, 2160, 2257,
2260, 2262, 2263, 2321,
2324, 2326, 2327, 2343,
2464, 2465, 2468, 2469,
2471
Jwin 2198
Kansai 2360
Kawasaki 2149
Kennex 2362
Kenwood 2041, 2151, 2348
KeyPlug 2362
Kiiro 2362
Kingavon 2358
Kiss 2380
KLH 2131, 2149
Koda 2358
Koss 2013, 2148, 2158
KXD 2359
Landel 2143
Lasonic 2132
Lawson 2355
Lecson 2381
Lenco 2358, 2362, 2367
Lenoxx 2136, 2153
LG 2002, 2033, 2038, 2057,
2129, 2133, 2189, 2191,
2223, 2238, 2270, 2288,
2335, 2373, 2375
Life 2182
Lifetec 2182
Limit 2355
Liquid Video 2158
Liteon 2043, 2051, 2142
Loewe 2320
LogicLab 2355
Magnavox 2025, 2050, 2137, 2150,
2159, 2224, 2230, 2358
Magnex 2367
Majestic 2360
Marantz 2328
Marquant 2362
Matsui 2148, 2378
McIntosh 2199
Mecotek 2362
Medion 2182
Memorex 2028, 2145, 2234
MiCO 2354, 2382
Micromaxx 2182
Microsoft 2156
Microstar 2182
Minoka 2362
Minowa 2367
Mintek 2131, 2245
Mitsubishi 2003
Mizuda 2358, 2359
Monyka 2380
Mustek 2186
Mx Onda 2354
Mystral 2366
Naiko 2362
Nesa 2131
Neufunk 2380
Nevir 2362
Next Base 2143
Nexxtech 2243
NU-TEC 2383
Onkyo 2159, 2368
Oopla 2051
Oppo 2196, 2255
Optim 2381
Optimus 2180
Orava 2358
Orbit 2363
Orion 2073, 2110
Oritron 2148, 2158
P&B 2358
Pacific 2355
Panasonic 2011, 2024, 2034, 2042,
2058, 2062, 2066, 2067,
2093, 2116, 2117, 2118,
2119, 2120, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2151, 2159, 2164,
2166, 2167, 2172, 2173,
2175, 2209, 2214, 2275,
2277, 2278, 2281, 2282,
2283, 2301, 2374, 2470
Parasound 2197
peeKTON 2364
9
Philips 2008, 2012, 2025, 2044,
2050, 2051, 2053, 2060,
2072, 2108, 2111, 2147,
2159, 2163, 2169, 2174,
2181, 2185, 2230, 2261,
2266, 2267, 2286, 2287,
2289, 2295, 2300, 2302,
2317, 2328, 2338, 2342,
2350, 2467
Phonotrend 2367
Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2035, 2092, 2094, 2095,
2109, 2157, 2180, 2190,
2212, 2269, 2272, 2299,
2304, 2305, 2306, 2307,
2308, 2309, 2310, 2311,
2344, 2345, 2347, 2379
Pointer 2362
Polaroid 2125, 2215, 2235
Portland 2362
Powerpoint 2363
Prima 2252
Proceed 2130
Proscan 2156
Prosonic 2360, 2377
Protron 2202
Provision 2358
Pye 2144
Qwestar 2148
Raite 2380
RCA 2021, 2029, 2104, 2105,
2131, 2149, 2156, 2157,
2229
RedStar 2356, 2360, 2362
Regent 2153
Reoc 2355
Rimax 2361
Rio 2133
Roadstar 2331, 2358
Ronin 2363
Rotel 2203
Rowa 2154, 2383
Rownsonic 2353
Saba 2148, 2188
Sabaki 2355
Saivod 2362
Sampo 2141
Samsung 2000, 2045, 2077, 2112,
2113, 2114, 2115, 2151,
2200, 2216, 2219, 2228,
2264, 2265, 2271, 2279,
2294, 2303, 2329, 2365
Sansui 2073, 2145, 2354, 2355,
2362
Sanyo 2134, 2145, 2217, 2292
ScanMagic 2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider 2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott 2161, 2357
Seeltech 2364
SEG 2161, 2355, 2363, 2380
Sharp 2006, 2040, 2088, 2091,
2182, 2194, 2220, 2221,
2231, 2236, 2293, 2340
Shinsonic 2245
Sigmatek 2359, 2364
Silva 2356
Singer 2354, 2355
Skymaster 2325, 2355
Skyworth 2356
Slim Art 2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue 2133
Sontech 2366
Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2009,
2014, 2015, 2023, 2026,
2027, 2052, 2068, 2069,
2070, 2071, 2074, 2075,
2084, 2085, 2087, 2168,
2171, 2208, 2210, 2211,
2258, 2273, 2284, 2285,
2312, 2313, 2314, 2315,
2318, 2319, 2466
Soundmaster 2355
Soundmax 2355
Spectra 2363
Spectroniq 2201
Standard 2355
Star Cluster 2355
Starmedia 2358, 2364
Sungale 2204
Sunkai 2362
Superscan 2150
Supervision 2355
Sylvania 2012, 2137, 2150, 2178,
2230, 2239
Symphonic 2108, 2230
Synn 2355
T.D.E. Systems 2366
Tatung 2001, 2362
TCM 2182, 2297
Teac 2149, 2333, 2355, 2383
Tec 2356
Technics 2151
Technika 2362, 2367
Telefunken 2353
Tensai 2362
Tevion 2182, 2355, 2357
Theta Digital 2157
Thomson 2183, 2188, 2334, 2372
Tokai 2356, 2380
Top Suxess 2364
Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2048, 2049, 2054, 2055,
2072, 2073, 2076, 2078,
2079, 2086, 2145, 2159,
2218, 2233, 2256, 2259,
2296, 2369, 2472
TRANScontinents
2363, 2367
Transonic 2367
Trio 2362
Trutech 2242
TruVision 2359
TSM 2364
Umax 2361
United 2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic 2245
Venturer 2149
Viewmaster 2364
Vocopro 2206
VocoStar 2207
Waitec 2364
Welltech 2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale 2354, 2355
Woxter 2361, 2364
Xbox 2156, 2183
Xlogic 2355, 2362
XMS 2362
Xoro 2382
Yamada 2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha 2056, 2064, 2065, 2080,
2081, 2082, 2083, 2089,
2118, 2151, 2323
Yamakawa 2363, 2380
Yukai 2186
Zenith 2002, 2129, 2133, 2159,
2223
Blu-ray Disc
Denon 2452, 2500, 2501
Hitachi 2460, 2461, 2463
JVC 2472, 2473, 2475, 2478,
2496, 2499, 2511
LG 2033, 2456, 2457
Marantz (US) 2454, 2455
Mitsubishi 2450, 2451
Onkyo 2504
Panasonic 2011, 2209, 2214, 2476,
2477, 2479
Philips 2510
Pioneer 2212, 2506
Samsung 2045, 2113, 2498
Sharp 2194, 2220, 2221, 2497,
2502, 2503
Sony 2075, 2453, 2458, 2459,
2507
Toshiba 2462
Yamaha 2064, 2448, 2449, 2474,
2505
DVR
Bush 2110
Hitachi 2090
Panasonic 2066, 2067, 2093, 2116,
2117, 2119, 2120, 2122,
2123
Philips 2108, 2111
Pioneer 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2092, 2094, 2095, 2109
RCA 2105
Samsung 2113, 2219
Sharp 2088, 2091
Sony 2084, 2085, 2087
Toshiba 2086, 2218
Victor 2475
Yamaha 2089, 2118
10
DVD Recorder
Aspire 2222
Astar 2240
Broksonic 2146
Go Video 2213
Hitachi 2062
Insignia 2002
Irradio 2053
JVC 2100, 2101, 2106, 2107
LG 2033, 2057, 2223, 2238
Liteon 2043
Panasonic 2011, 2034, 2058, 2062,
2116, 2117, 2119, 2120,
2121, 2123
Philips 2008, 2044, 2050, 2051,
2147
Pioneer 2017, 2035
Pye 2144
Samsung 2000, 2112, 2216
Sansui 2073
Sanyo 2217
Sony 2004, 2005, 2007, 2052,
2068, 2069, 2074, 2208,
2210, 2211
Sylvania 2239
Toshiba 2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2049, 2054, 2055, 2076
Yamaha 2056
Cable
ABC 3002, 3003, 3017, 3066,
3067, 3086, 3093, 3119,
3122
ADB 3020
Adelphia 3081
Alcatel 3016
Americast 3124
Amstrad 3022, 3098
Antronix 3065, 3070
Archer 3070
Arcon 3098
AT&T 3095
Axis 3098
Bell South 3124
Cable Vision 3092
Cabletenna 3065
Cabletime 3104
Cableview 3087
Clearmaster 3127
ClearMax 3127
Clyde Cablevision
3105
Colour Voice 3068
Comcast 3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt 3107
Comtronics 3069
Contec 3074
Coolmax 3127
COX 3084
Cryptovision 3110
Director 3084
Eastern 3075
Everquest 3123
Fidelity 3098
Filmnet 3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux 3097
FIOS 3004
Focus 3126
Foxtel 3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox 3023
GC Electronics 3070
GE 3066, 3093
GEC 3105
Gemini 3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066, 3084,
3090, 3096, 3117
Goldstar 3120
Gooding 3099
Grundig 3098, 3099
Hamlin 3073, 3078
Hirschmann 3097
Hitachi 3066
HomeChoice 3106
Humax 3021, 3080, 3083
ITT Nokia 3097
Jasco 3123
Jerrold 3017, 3018, 3025, 3066,
3072, 3084, 3090, 3096,
3119, 3123
JVC 3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121
Macab 3101
Magnavox 3079
Maspro 3099
Matsui 3099
MegaCable 3117
Memorex 3076, 3122
Minerva 3099
Mnet 3107
Motorola 3025, 3026, 3084, 3088,
3090, 3095, 3117
Movie Time 3077, 3109
Mr Zapp 3101
Multichoice 3107
Multitech 3127
NEC 3064
NET Brazil 3085
Nokia 3097
Noos 3101
NSC 3077
Oak 3074
Pace 3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium 3099
Panasonic 3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon 3122
Philips 3068, 3071, 3079, 3099,
3100, 3101, 3103
Pioneer 3001, 3006, 3094, 3098,
3114, 3116, 3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan 3066, 3093
Pulsar 3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018
Quasar 3122
RadioShack 3123, 3127
RCA 3030, 3031, 3087, 3118
Realistic 3070
Recoton 3126
Regal 3078
Regency 3075
Rembrandt 3066
Runco 3122
Sagem 3101
Samsung 3069, 3089, 3114, 3120
SAT 3098
Scientific Atlanta
3000, 3001, 3002, 3003,
3006, 3028, 3029, 3081,
3086, 3089, 3094, 3095,
3108
Signal 3072, 3123
Signature 3066
Sony 3092, 3125
Sprucer 3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom 3017, 3072, 3119, 3123
Stargate 3072, 3123
Starquest 3072, 3123
Supercable 3090
Supermax 3127
Tele+1 3107, 3111
TELENET 3007
Telepiu 3107
Thomson 3082, 3091
TIME WARNER
3084
Tocom 3067
Torx 3017
Toshiba 3122
Tristar 3127
Tudi 3102
Tusa 3072, 3123
TV86 3077
Unika 3065, 3070
United Cable 3018, 3119
Universal 3065, 3070
Universum 3097, 3099
V2 3127
Videoway 3019
View Star 3074, 3077, 3079
Viewmaster 3127
Vision 3127
Visiopass 3097, 3100, 3101
Vortex View 3127
Wittenberg 3098
Zenith 3113, 3122, 3124
Zentek 3126
Satellite
AB Sat 4216, 4217
AccessHD 4104
ADB 4220
AGS 4216
Akai 4053, 4055
Alba 4001, 4004, 4006, 4007,
4062, 4217
Aldes 4005, 4007, 4010
Allsat 4048, 4053, 4055
11
Allsonic 4005, 4008, 4024
Alltech 4217
Alpha 4053
Alpha Digital 4104
Alphastar 4077
Amitronica 4217
Amstrad 4011, 4035, 4217, 4218
Anglo 4217
Ankaro 4005, 4008, 4024, 4217
Anttron 4001, 4004
Apollo 4001
Armstrong 4011, 4053
Artec 4100
Asat 4053, 4055
ASLF 4217
Astacom 4216
Astra 4009, 4011, 4054, 4217,
4219
Astro 4004, 4008, 4010, 4015,
4024, 4213, 4218, 4219
AudioTon 4004, 4048
Aurora 4222
Austar 4222
Axiel 4216
Axis 4008, 4009, 4024, 4050
BBK 4205
Best 4008, 4024
Blaupunkt 4015
Blue Sky 4217
Boca 4011, 4054, 4059, 4217
Boston 4216
Brain Wave 4013
Broadcast 4012
Broco 4217
BSkyB 4035, 4041
BT 4216
Bubu Sat 4217
Bush 4006, 4045
Cambridge 4218
Canal Satellite 4213
Canal+ 4213
CaptiveWorks 4099
Channel Master 4007, 4110
Chaparral 4075
CHEROKEE 4216
Chess 4212, 4217
CityCom 4006, 4215, 4219
Clatronic 4013
CNT 4010
Comag 4080, 4081, 4082, 4083,
4086
Commlink 4005
Comtech 4050
Condor 4008, 4024, 4219
Connexions 4014, 4024
Conrad 4024, 4215, 4218, 4219
Conrad Electronic
4217, 4219
Contec 4050
Coolsat 4096
Cosat 4048
Coship 4109
Crown 4011
Daeryung 4014
Daewoo 4057, 4217
DDC 4007
Delega 4007
Dew 4050
Diamond 4051
Digiality 4219
Digital Stream 4105
DIRECTV 4056, 4064, 4067, 4068,
4070, 4071, 4074, 4107,
4116, 4119, 4121, 4122,
4123, 4127, 4192, 4193,
4194, 4195, 4196, 4197,
4198, 4199, 4200, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206, 4207,
4221
Discoverer 4212
Discovery 4216
Diseqc 4216
Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089, 4092,
4094, 4095, 4117
Dishpro 4018, 4117
Distrisat 4053
Ditristrad 4048
DNT 4014, 4053, 4055
Drake 4072
DStv 4222
Dune 4024, 4240, 4242
Echostar 4014, 4018, 4065, 4089,
4117, 4217
Einhell 4001, 4005, 4011, 4217,
4218
Elap 4216, 4217
Elekta 4010
Elsat 4217
Elta 4001, 4008, 4024, 4048,
4053, 4055
Emanon 4001
Emme Esse 4008, 4024
Engel 4217
Ep Sat 4006
EURIEULT 4031
Eurodec 4052
Europa 4053, 4218, 4219
Europhon 4219
Eurosat 4011
Eurosky 4008, 4011, 4215, 4218,
4219, 4024
Eurostar 4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat 4217
Exator 4001, 4004
Expressvu 4117
Fenner 4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson 4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity 4218
Finlandia 4006
Finlux 4006
FinnSat 4050, 4052
Flair Mate 4217
Foxtel 4222
Freecom 4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal 4024, 4217
Fuba 4001, 4008, 4014, 4015,
4024, 4055, 4215
Galaxis 4005, 4008, 4009, 4024,
4048, 4050, 4215, 4222
GE 4066, 4093, 4111, 4197
General Instrument
4019, 4073
GMI 4011
GOI 4117
Goldbox 4213
GoldStar 4049
Goodmans 4002, 4006, 4029
Goodmind 4111
Grandin 4031
Grothusen 4001, 4049
Grundig 4004, 4006, 4015, 4035,
4211, 4218, 4222
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor 4001, 4013
Hanuri 4010
Hauppauge 4044
Heliocom 4219
Helium 4219
Hinari 4007
Hirschmann 4015, 4024, 4210, 4216,
4218, 4219
Hisawa 4013
Hisense 4016
Hitachi 4006, 4114, 4199, 4203
Homecast 4084, 4085, 4087
Houston 4048
HTS 4117
Hughes 4064, 4068, 4192, 4194,
4196, 4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax 4025, 4030, 4060, 4097
Huth 4005, 4011, 4012, 4013,
4048, 4050, 4219, 4223
Hypson 4031
Ilo 4016
Imex 4031
Innovation 4008
Insignia 4107
Intertronic 4011
Intervision 4048, 4219
ITT Nokia 4006
Jerrold 4019
Johansson 4013
JOK 4216
JSR 4048
JVC 4029, 4065, 4089, 4117
Kamm 4217
Kathrein 4015, 4034, 4042, 4053,
4055, 4063, 4215, 4216,
4217
Kathrein Eurostar
4215
Klap 4216
Konig 4219
Kosmos 4049
KR 4004
Kreiselmeyer 4015
K-SAT 4217
Kyostar 4001
L&S Electronic 4024
Lasat 4008, 4010, 4024, 4054,
4212, 4215, 4219
Lasonic 4108
Lenco 4001, 4024, 4049, 4215,
4217, 4219
Leng 4013
Lennox 4048
Lenson 4218
Lexus 4053
12
LG 4049, 4103, 4107
Lifesat 4008, 4024, 4212, 4217
Lifetec 4008
Lorenzen 4219
Lorraine 4049
Lupus 4008, 4024
Luxor 4218
Lyonnaise 4052
Macab 4052
Magnavox 4127, 4101
Manata 4031, 4216, 4217
Manhattan 4006, 4010, 4048, 4216
Marantz 4055
Mascom 4010
Maspro 4006, 4217
Matsui 4216
Max 4219
Mediabox 4213
Mediamarkt 4011
Mediasat 4009, 4213, 4218
Medion 4008, 4024, 4217
Medison 4217
Mega 4053, 4055
Memorex 4127
Metronic 4001, 4004, 4005, 4010,
4028, 4031, 4217
Metz 4015
Micro electronic 4217, 4218, 4219
Micro Technology
4217
MicroGem 4106
Micromaxx 4008, 4024
Microstar 4008
Microtec 4217
Minerva 4015
Mitsubishi 4006, 4015, 4202
Mitsumi 4054
Morgan's 4011, 4053, 4054, 4055,
4217
Motorola 4019, 4088, 4090, 4091
Multichoice 4222
Multitec 4212
Muratto 4049
Mysat 4217
Navex 4013
Neuhaus 4009, 4048, 4217, 4218,
4219
Neusat 4217
Next Level 4019
NextWave 4223
Nikko 4011, 4217
Nokia 4006, 4040
Nordmende 4001, 4006, 4007, 4010,
4052
Nova 4222
Novis 4013
Oceanic 4051
Octagon 4001, 4004, 4050
Okano 4011
Optex 4048
Optus 4213, 4222, 4223
Orbitech 4001, 4212, 4213, 4218
OSat 4004
Otto Versand 4015
Pace 4006, 4015, 4035, 4043,
4047, 4204, 4216, 4243
Pacific 4051
Packsat 4216
Palcom 4007
Palladium 4011, 4218
Palsat 4212, 4218
Panasat 4222
Panasonic 4006, 4035, 4036, 4121,
4124, 4126, 4198, 4221
Panda 4006, 4219
Pansat 4125
Patriot 4216
Paysat 4127
PCT 4110
Philco 4101
Philips 4006, 4033, 4053, 4055,
4061, 4068, 4071, 4127,
4196, 4201, 4202, 4203,
4206, 4213, 4216
Phoenix 4050
Phonotrend 4006, 4005, 4048
Pioneer 4046, 4213
Polsat 4052
Predki 4013
Premiere 4048, 4213
Priesner 4011
Primestar 4076
Profile 4216
Promax 4006
Prosat 4005, 4007
Proscan 4066, 4093, 4122, 4197
Protek 4051
Proton 4016
Provision 4010
Quadral 4005, 4007, 4008, 4216,
4024
Quelle 4015, 4215, 4219
Quiero 4052
RadioShack 4019
Radiola 4053, 4055
Radix 4014, 4037
Rainbow 4004
RCA 4066, 4093, 4112, 4113,
4116, 4118, 4119, 4197,
4122, 4207
Realistic 4078
Redpoint 4009
Redstar 4008, 4024
RFT 4005, 4053, 4055
Roadstar 4217
Roch 4031
Rover 4024, 4217
Saba 4010, 4215, 4216, 4219
Sabre 4006
Sagem 4023, 4052
Sakura 4050
Samsung 4000, 4001, 4003, 4032,
4064, 4069, 4071, 4120,
4123, 4196, 4200
SAT 4007, 4218
Sat Cruiser 4223
Sat Partner 4001, 4004, 4010, 4013,
4049, 4218
Sat Team 4217
Satcom 4012, 4219
Satec 4217
Satelco 4024
Satford 4012
Satmaster 4012
Satplus 4212
Schneider 4008, 4212, 4216
Schwaiger 4051, 4212, 4219
SCS 4215
Seemann 4009, 4011, 4014
SEG 4001, 4008, 4013, 4024
Seleco 4048
Servi Sat 4031, 4217
Siemens 4015
Silva 4049
Skantin 4217
Skardin 4009
Skinsat 4218
SKR 4217
Skymaster 4005, 4017, 4022, 4212,
4217
Skymax 4053, 4055
SkySat 4212, 4217, 4218, 4219
Skyvision 4048
SM Electronic 4212, 4217
Smart 4215, 4217
Sony 4067, 4070, 4213
SR 4011, 4054
Star Choice 4019
Starland 4217
Starring 4013
Start Trak 4001
Strong 4001, 4004, 4008, 4024,
4049, 4222
STS 4115
STVI 4031
Sumida 4011
Sunny Sound 4024
Sunsat 4217
Sunstar 4011, 4024, 4054
Supermax 4223
Tandberg 4052
Tandy 4004
Tantec 4006
TCM 4008
Techniland 4012
TechniSat 4014, 4021, 4026, 4027,
4038, 4039, 4053, 4212,
4213, 4218
Technology 4222
Technosat 4223
Technowelt 4219
Teco 4011, 4054
Telanor 4007
Telasat 4215, 4219
Telecom 4217
Telefunken 4001, 4017, 4216
Teleka 4004, 4011, 4014, 4218,
4219
Telemaster 4010
TELENET 4241
Telesat 4219
Telestar 4212, 4213, 4218
Televes 4006, 4218
Telewire 4048
Tempo 4223
Tevion 4008, 4217
Thomson 4006, 4020, 4052, 4058,
4208, 4213, 4215, 4216,
4217, 4219
Thorens 4051
Thorn 4006
Tivax 4104
Tivo 4196
Tokai 4053
Tonna 4006, 4012, 4048, 4217,
4218
Toshiba 4194, 4202, 4203
Triad 4049
Triasat 4218
Triax 4015, 4215, 4217, 4218
Turnsat 4217
Tvonics 4214
Twinner 4031, 4217
UEC 4222
Uher 4212
UltimateTV 4070
Uniden 4079, 4127
Unisat 4011, 4050, 4053
Unitor 4013
Universum 4015, 4215, 4219
US Digital 4016
Variosat 4015
Vega 4024
Ventana 4053, 4055
Viewsat 4098
Visiosat 4013, 4048, 4216, 4217
Voom 4019
Vortec 4001
Welltech 4212
WeTeKom 4212, 4218
Wevasat 4006
Wewa 4006
Winersat 4013
Wisi 4006, 4014, 4015, 4218,
4219
Woorisat 4010
Worldsat 4216
Xrypton 4024
XSat 4217
Zehnder 4008, 4209, 4010, 4215,
4024
Zenith 4102, 4107, 4195
Zodiac 4004
CD
Yamaha 5082, 5095
CD Recorder
Yamaha 5083
MD
Yamaha 5080, 5081, 5086
Tape
Yamaha 5084, 5087
Tuner
Yamaha 5066, 5085, 5088, 5090,
5092
LD
Yamaha 2080
Amplifier
Yamaha 5019, 5020, 5098
Apple TV
Apple 2241
“Apple TV” is a trademark or registered mark
of Apple Inc.
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE161A0/RC

Navigation menu